Operation/Reference Guide

TPDesign4
Touch Panel Design Program
(v2.11 or higher)

S of t w ar e

Last Revised: 9/22/2009

Software License and Warranty Agreement
• LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment, exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software. TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been returned or destroyed. PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES. LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE, including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory. LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ©(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs ©(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.

• •

This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) ...............................................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1 What's New in Version 2.11...................................................................................... 1 Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements .............................................. 1
Supported Operating Systems ........................................................................................ 1 Supported Operating System Languages ...................................................................... 1 PC Requirements/Recommendations .............................................................................. 2

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions............................................................ 2
Supported Panel Types ................................................................................................... 2 Supported Screen Resolutions ........................................................................................ 3 Supported Screen Resolutions - NXI-TPI/4 ...................................................................... 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO ........................................................................ 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO-DVI ................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels ............................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels ............................................................ 5 Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels ........................................................................ 5 AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images ........................................... 6

True Type Font Support............................................................................................ 6 Supported Image File Types ..................................................................................... 6 Related Software Applications.................................................................................. 6
NetLinx Studio ................................................................................................................ 6 AMX WebUpdate ............................................................................................................ 7 G4 PanelBuilder .............................................................................................................. 7 G4 PanelPreview ............................................................................................................. 7

The TPDesign4 Work Area .................................................................................9
Overview .................................................................................................................. 9 Design View Windows ............................................................................................ 10
Design View Window tab controls ................................................................................ 11 Using the Zoom Controls .............................................................................................. 11 Magnifier Window......................................................................................................... 12

Workspace Window ................................................................................................ 12
Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab ................................................................................ 13 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 14

Properties Window ................................................................................................. 14
Properties Control - General Tab .................................................................................. 15 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 16 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 17

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

i

Table of Contents

Using the Apply To All option ....................................................................................... 18 Using the Prev and Next buttons .................................................................................. 18

State Manager window........................................................................................... 19
State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu ............................................................................ 20

Transfer Status Window.......................................................................................... 20 Status Bar ............................................................................................................... 21 Button Preview Window ......................................................................................... 22 Print Preview Window ............................................................................................ 23 Working With Dockable Windows .......................................................................... 23
Moving, Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows ....................................................... 23 Toggling the Windows .................................................................................................. 23

Using the New Project Wizard ..........................................................................25
Overview ................................................................................................................ 25 New Project Wizard dialogs.................................................................................... 26
New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog .............................................................................. 26 New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog.......................................................................... 27 New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog......................................................................... 28

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) .................................................................................29
Overview ................................................................................................................ 29 Inappropriate File Name Characters ....................................................................... 29 Creating a New Project........................................................................................... 29 System-Generated Project File Names ................................................................... 30 Edit Focus ............................................................................................................... 31 Quick Input ............................................................................................................. 31 Undo/Redo ............................................................................................................. 32 Cutting, Copying and Pasting ................................................................................. 32 Using the Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 33 Working With Video Fills ........................................................................................ 33 Drag and Drop Support .......................................................................................... 34 Using G4 PanelPreview ........................................................................................... 34 Setting Project Properties ...................................................................................... 34
Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab....................................................... 35 Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab ............................................... 37 Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab ......................................................................... 38 Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab ............................................. 39

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File ................................................ 40 Setting a Power Up Page........................................................................................ 41 Setting Power Up Popup Pages.............................................................................. 41

ii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Setting an Inactive Page Flip .................................................................................. 42 Using the Workspace Window ................................................................................ 43
Workspace Window - Pages Tab ................................................................................... 43 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 44 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window ........................................... 44

Using the Properties Window ................................................................................. 45
Properties Window - General Tab ................................................................................. 45 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 46 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 46

Working With Multiple Projects .............................................................................. 46
Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously.................................................................... 46 Copying/Pasting Across Projects................................................................................... 46

Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4)...................................... 47
Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 ..................................................................................... 47

R-4 Remote Controller Projects .............................................................................. 48
Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers .................................................... 48 R-4 Remote Devices - Unsupported Button Types ........................................................ 49

R-4 Setup Codes ..................................................................................................... 49
Levels: .......................................................................................................................... 49 Addresses ..................................................................................................................... 49 External Button Options ............................................................................................... 50 R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes .............................................................. 50

Working With The Resource Manager ..............................................................51
Overview ................................................................................................................ 51 Working With Images ............................................................................................. 53
Resource Manager dialog - Images tab ......................................................................... 53 Static Image Files .......................................................................................................... 53 Supported Image File Types ......................................................................................... 54 Importing Image Files Into Your Project ....................................................................... 54

Working With Dynamic Images............................................................................... 56
Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab .......................................................... 56 Dynamic Images ............................................................................................................ 57 Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project ............................................................... 57 Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Dynamic Image .................................................... 58

DynaMo™ Dynamic Images .................................................................................... 60
Creating a DynaMo Image ............................................................................................ 60 Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager .................................... 61 Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images ...................................................... 62 Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images .................................................. 62

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

iii

Table of Contents

Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output........................................... 63
Network Path Information............................................................................................. 63 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis.................................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic .......................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek ............................................................. 65 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras .............................................................................. 65 DynaMo Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Streaming Webcam Image..................... 65

Working With Slots ................................................................................................. 68
Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab............................................................................. 68 Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions ............................................................ 69

Working With Icons................................................................................................. 70
Bitmaps vs. Icons ........................................................................................................... 70

Working With Sounds ............................................................................................. 71
Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab......................................................................... 71 Supported Sound File Types ......................................................................................... 72 Importing Sound Files To Your Project.......................................................................... 72

Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory ...... 72 Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs ....................................... 73
Editing Image Files ........................................................................................................ 73 Editing Sound Files........................................................................................................ 73

Working With Pages .........................................................................................75
Overview ................................................................................................................ 75 Creating a New Page .............................................................................................. 75 Setting Page Properties.......................................................................................... 76
Setting General Properties: Pages ................................................................................ 76 Setting Programming Properties: Pages ....................................................................... 76 Setting States Properties: Pages ................................................................................... 76

Renaming a Page .................................................................................................... 77 Adding a Fill Color to a Page.................................................................................. 77 Adding a Bitmap to a Page..................................................................................... 78 Adding an Icon to a Page ....................................................................................... 79 Adding Text to a Page............................................................................................ 79 Displaying a Video Source on a Page ..................................................................... 81 Copying/Pasting Pages ........................................................................................... 81
Copying Pages .............................................................................................................. 81 Pasting Pages ................................................................................................................ 81

Deleting Pages From a Project ............................................................................... 81 Exporting Pages as Image Files .............................................................................. 82 Printing Pages......................................................................................................... 83

iv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 85 Creating a Popup Page...... 100 Specifying a Button Border............................................................................................. 100 Adding Text to a Button .. 94 Show/Hide Popup Pages .......................................................................................................... 88 Setting General Properties: Popup Pages......................................... 94 Copying Popup Pages .................... 91 Adding an Icon to a Popup Page .................................... 101 Adding a Fill Color To a Button ...................... 90 Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page ..................................... 103 Adding an Icon to a Button........................................................................................................................................ 107 Adding Text Effects .......... 94 Pasting Popup Pages............................................................................................................................................................................11 or higher) v ................................................. 102 Adding a Bitmap to a Button .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 90 Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page.. 93 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages........................................................................................ 85 Using the Popup Draw Tool............................................... 95 Working With Buttons ............................................................................................................Table of Contents Working With Popup Pages ............................................................... 90 Renaming a Popup Page..................... 102 Changing the Button Fill Color................................................................................................................................................... 98 Generated Button Names ............................................ 107 TPDesign4 (v2....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 88 Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages...... 89 Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages ........... 100 Foreign Language Support for Text ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 87 Setting Popup Page Properties ............................................ 107 Page Flips ......... 97 Drawing a Button........................................... 91 Adding Text to a Popup Page ........................... 89 Setting States Properties: Popup Pages .......................................... 97 Button Draw Tools ................................... 106 Displaying a Video Source on a Button.......................................................................................................................................................................... 94 Deleting Popup Pages From a Project ..97 Overview .................. 92 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page ......... 99 Specifying the Button Type .................................................................. 93 Creating Popup Page Groups .....................................................85 Overview .................................................................................................... 104 Working With Transparent Backgrounds..............................................................................................................................

......................... 110 Copying Buttons... 113 Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons ..................................................................................... 112 Multi-State General Buttons ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 127 Position Assist toolbar................ 123 Input Mask Next Field Characters ........................... 109 Page Flip Actions................... 114 Bargraph Buttons........................ 108 Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips ................................ 110 Pasting Buttons ................................................................ 117 Formatting Codes ........................................................................................................................................................ 128 Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 110 Editing Button Properties .......................................................... 129 Previewing a Button ............................................................................................................................................................................... 113 Level Control Parameters .............................................Table of Contents Creating a Page Flip .......................... 118 Working With Touch Maps ................ 116 Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons..................11 or higher) ................................ 123 Computer Control Buttons .................................................................... 112 Setting Properties: General Buttons .................. 127 Order Assist toolbar .............. 123 Input Mask Ranges ..................................... 122 Input Mask Characters............................................................................................................................................................ 127 Size Assist toolbar .............................. 121 Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons .......... 125 Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons ............................ 124 TakeNote Buttons................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 109 Copying/Pasting Buttons ........ 111 Editing Multiple Selections........................ 121 Text Input Buttons .............................................................................................................................................. 116 Slider Types.................. 120 Joystick Buttons.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 111 General Buttons ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 117 Creating a Custom Slider .................................................................................................................................... 123 Input Mask Operators ....................... 130 Creating a Date Button.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 131 vi TPDesign4 (v2.... 125 Setting Default New Button Parameters ................................................................................................... 126 Using the Drawing Assist Features .... 115 Multi-State Bargraph Buttons ............. 124 Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons ...............................

..................................................... 138 Working With List Box Buttons ......................... 135 Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels ................................................................................ 145 Setting List Box Container Button Properties ............................Resizing.............................................................................................Z-Order ....... 150 Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons .............. 142 Adding Columns................................ 141 Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) ......................Table of Contents Creating a Time Button................................................................... 151 Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) ................Drag and Drop Capability........................................................................................................ 136 Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons .......................... 152 List Box Buttons ............. 143 Cutting.............................................................................................................................................................. 135 Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ................................................................................................. 136 Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs .............. 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs ....................................... 140 List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode ........................................................................135 Overview ................................................................. 132 Working With External Controls ................................................................................................................................ Copying and Pasting a List Box ................................................................. 148 List Box Buttons .........................................Subordinate Buttons .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 141 Adding Rows .......................................................................................................... Column Properties.............................................. 139 G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons ........................... 148 Setting List Box Button Column Properties.........................................................................................Container Button........... 135 External Button Options . 136 Setting Global Properties for External LEDs ........ 146 List Box Buttons ................................11 or higher) vii ... 153 List Box Buttons ................................................................................................................................................................. 143 Deleting Rows ......................................................................................................................................Columns....................................................................................................... 144 List Box Buttons ..................................... 144 List Box Container Properties vs................................................... 147 Subordinate Button Placement ................................................................................................. 148 Setting Properties: List Box Columns ......139 Overview ......................................... 147 Subordinate Buttons ........ 145 Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons. 154 Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons .............. 143 Deleting Columns....... 154 TPDesign4 (v2....................................................................................................................................... 140 List Box Toolbar... 140 List Box Buttons: Managed Mode............................................................. 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons........ 149 List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode .......................................................

............................................................. 180 Cursor Color ................Table of Contents List Box Buttons ............................................................... 159 Dynamic List Box Data............................................... 179 Animate Time Down .................................. 172 Working With Properties ..................................................... 164 Data List Commands ............................................................................ 179 Column Display Order ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 180 viii TPDesign4 (v2..................................................................................................................................................................................... 159 Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button............................................ 176 Using the Prev and Next buttons ................................................. 167 Dynamic List box Table Example ........ 179 Border Style ................................................. 157 Navigation Buttons .................................................................................11 or higher) ........................................................................................................... 175 Using the Apply To All option ............... 178 General Properties...................... 154 Creating List Box Navigation Buttons ........................................... 169 Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button .......... 158 List Data Table ...............Navigation Buttons .......................... 163 Deleting a List Data Table ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Channel Code Values ....................................................... 171 Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table .................. 157 Scroll Bar Components .......................................................................................................................................... 179 Animate Time Up................................................................................................................................................................................................... 155 Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................175 Overview ...................... 166 Command Structure List View ..................... 179 Above Popups ... 159 Static List Box Data .............................................. 175 Drag and Drop Support ...................................................................................................................................... 176 Working With The Property Painter.................................................................. 164 Creating a Dynamic List Data Table ....................... 160 Creating a Static List Data Table...................................................................................................................................... 179 Auto-Repeat .................................................. 179 Color Depth................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 156 Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar........................................ 177 Saving a Properties Set .................................................................... 164 Data List Command Rules............................................................................................................... 179 Column Sort Order ....................................................... 180 Compression.............................................................................. 158 List Data Table Properties ............................................................... 180 Cursor Name .......................................................................................................................... 160 Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button ..........................

......................................................................................................... 182 List Column .............................................................................................................. 181 Hide Effect X/Y Pos.................................................................................................................................................................. 185 Password Character ........................................................................................................................... 182 List Column Padding ................................................................. 180 Group ................................ 186 Show Effect ................................................................................................................... 181 Left......................... 184 Lock Button Name................................................................................................................... 185 Remote Host ... 185 Page Flip ............................................................................................................................. 180 Display Type....... 181 Hide Effect .......................................... 184 List Preferred Row Height................................................11 or higher) ix ....................................... 181 Hidden ....................................................... On Show .. 184 List Row Height .................................................................................. 184 List Selectable ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 182 List Display ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Remote Port................................................................................... 185 Password Protection ..... 182 List Table Port ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Name........... 186 TPDesign4 (v2............................................................................................................ 182 List Table Address........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 183 List Managed....................... 183 List Offset Enabled...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Reset Pos...................................... 185 Modal ....... 185 Max Text Length ................................................................................................................................Table of Contents Description............ 185 Password ...... 181 Hide Effect Time .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 183 List Table Wrap ................................................................. 183 List Preferred Row .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 180 Disabled .............................................. 186 Show Effect Time ................... 181 Input Mask .............. 183 List Filter Column ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 184 List Row Padding............................................................................................ 180 Height .................................................................. 186 Scale To Fit..................... 184 List Row...............................................

..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 187 Touch Style. 191 Range Time Up ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 187 TakeNote Port................................................................... 189 Feedback..... 190 Level Control Type ... 190 Level Port ............... 192 x TPDesign4 (v2............................................................... 187 Type .......................... 190 Range Aux Inverted...................................... 190 Range Drag Increment ............................ 186 TakeNote Enabled........ 189 Channel Code ......................................... 187 Top ...... 191 Range Inverted ................................................................................................ 187 Touch Map............................................. 192 Bitmap.................................... 189 Command Output ................................................................................. 189 Level Aux............................. 191 State Properties.......................................................................................................... 188 Programing Properties.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range Time Down ...................................................................................11 or higher) ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 191 String Output ............................................... 190 Level Control Repeat Time .............................................................................................................................................................. 189 Address Code................. 186 Slider Color ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Level Code ....................................................................................... 187 TakeNote Host ................................................................................................................. 190 Level Control Value ............................. 188 Value Direction............................... 191 String Output Port .............................................................................................................................................................. 189 Channel Port...................................................................................................................................................................................... 186 State Count .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 186 Slider Name............................. 187 Timeout ................................................................. 189 Address Port .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range High.................................................................................................................. 191 Range Low...................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Command Port ....................... 188 Width............................................................................................................Table of Contents Show Effect X/Y Pos................................... 190 Level Function ..................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 192 Chameleon Image ............................................................................. 195 Text Y Offset................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 196 Video Cropping.............................. 192 Draw Order ...................................................................Table of Contents Bitmap Justification............. 192 Border Color ............... 195 Text Effect Color .............................................................. 196 Word Wrap............................. 203 TPDesign4 (v2.............................................................................................................. 193 Font................................................................................................................ 195 Text Effect......................................................... 196 Video Fill ....................................................................................................................................................... 197 Searching and Replacing Button Properties ............................................................................. 193 Icon X Offset .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text ................. 193 Icon Y Offset ....................................................................................................... 201 Adding States To a Button ................................................ 192 Border Name.... 195 Text Justification ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194 Scale Bitmap To Fit ..................................................................................................... 196 Using the All States Option ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194 Overall Opacity ......................................................................................................................................................................... 193 Icon Slot ......................................................................................................11 or higher) xi .................. 196 Searching For Button Properties ............ 195 Streaming Source .... 193 Icon Justification .................................................... 195 Text Color ................................................................... 193 Marquee Direction ............................................................ 196 Video Touch Pass-Thru ...................................... 201 State Manager Context Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 201 State Manager Window ....................................................................... 194 Sound ............................................ 198 Working With States ..... 202 Duplicating an Existing State on the Button .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 192 Bitmap Y Offset...........................................................................................................201 Overview .............................................. 195 Text X Offset................... 202 Adding States From the Clipboard ............................. 194 Marquee Repeat ....................................................... 193 Fill Color..................................................... 192 Bitmap X Offset ...........................................................................................................................................................

.................... 205 Copying/Pasting States From a Page............. 206 Working With Function Codes .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 206 Changing the Draw Order for Selected States..................................................................................................... 218 Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program.................................................213 Working With Colors................................ 213 Working With Palettes ....................................................................................................................................................... 215 Creating New Palette Entries ......... 205 Pasting a State from the Clipboard ...................................................... 208 Function Codes ................... 208 0......................................................................... 205 Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop ............................. 217 Exporting Palette Files ............................................. 210 Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) ....................................11 or higher) ........................... 215 Working With Multiple Color Palettes............................................................................................................... 205 Changing the Order Of States On A Button ........Table of Contents Drag & Drop To Add States .............................................. 217 Copying Palette Entries.... 208 Function Code Map ........................................................................................................ 217 Copying Palettes ...................................................... 204 Removing States From A Button............. 210 Assign Codes..................................................................................................................................... 207 Show/Hide Function Codes....................... 218 xii TPDesign4 (v2....................................................................................................... 205 Copying a State to the Clipboard....................................207 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Popup Page or Button ................................................................................................. 204 Cutting States To the Clipboard................................................................................................................................. 205 Reordering States Through the Clipboard .... 203 Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button ........................................................ 211 Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 205 Draw Order (Z-Order) ............................................................. 217 Importing Palette Files ..............................................................................Limitations....................................... 217 Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder ...................................... 216 Changing the Active Palette................................................................................... 210 Clear Channels First.........................................................................................................Setup Port................................................................... 209 Using Power Assign ................................ 216 Renaming Palettes........................................................ 215 Creating Custom Palettes........ 204 Deleting States........................................................................................................................................................... 211 Working With Colors and Palettes .......... 211 Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign).......................................................................................................

............................................................. 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port ....................................................................................... 223 Animation Wizard ................................. 233 Secure NetLinx Connections ....................................................................................................................................................Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) ......... 224 Animation Wizard ........................................................................................................ 220 Displaying a Video Source on a Button ..... 236 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem.....Appearance (Step 5 of 6) .................................. 228 Tweeners sub-menu ......................................................................... 238 Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master ................................................................................................................................................................... 228 Chameleon Images .............................................. 227 Creating Animated Text Effects .......................................................................Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) ...................................................................................... 230 Chameleon Images........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 237 Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master........................................................................................................................................Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) .......... 234 Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations ..................... 220 Working With Animation Effects ............................Finish (Step 6 of 6) .............................................................. 223 Animation Wizard ............................................................................................................................ 226 Creating Animated Bitmap Effects....... 229 Working With Chameleon Images ............ Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder...............................223 Overview .......... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master ...........Table of Contents Working With Video Fills ...................233 Overview ........219 Overview .. 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Page........................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page ... 238 TPDesign4 (v2..................................................................... 223 Using the Animation Wizard ......................................................................... 225 Creating Color Transition Effects ........................................Example ........ 238 Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP ................................ 219 Streaming Video Fills .................................................................................................. 225 Tweening ...... 234 Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration.................................................................................................................................................. 229 Requirements for Chameleon Images .............................................................. 223 Animation Wizard .. 233 Working With Communications Configurations ................................................................................... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP .......................... 231 File Transfer Operations ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 225 Animation Wizard .............Select Type (Step 1 of 6)........................................... 238 Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master..................11 or higher) xiii ...................... 230 Working With Chameleon Images .............................................................................................................................................................. 224 Animation Wizard .....

Table of Contents

Panel File Transfers via Serial Port .............................................................................. 239 Panel File Transfers via Modem................................................................................... 240 Transfer Options ......................................................................................................... 241

Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers............................................................... 241
Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers.................. 241 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers .................................. 242 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP)................................................... 242

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection .................. 242
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 242 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 243

Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers................................................................... 243
Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels.................................................... 243 Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers...................... 243 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers ...................................... 244 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB)....................................................... 244

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection ...................... 244
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 244 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 244

MVP-5200i USB Driver .......................................................................................... 245

Working With Templates ................................................................................247
Importing Template (*.VAT or *.TPT) Files ............................................................ 247 Working With the System Page Template ............................................................ 247
Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project .................................................. 248 Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page ...................................... 249 Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads .................................................. 249 System Page Template Reference ............................................................................... 250 System Page Template Popup Pages .......................................................................... 251

Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template........................................ 252 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements.................................. 254
Navigation Elements ................................................................................................... 254 Placeholder Elements .................................................................................................. 255

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements .................................. 256
Mode Elements ........................................................................................................... 256 Sub-Navigation Elements ............................................................................................ 257 Splash Elements .......................................................................................................... 257 Device Elements .......................................................................................................... 258 Feature Elements ........................................................................................................ 258 Sub-Feature Elements ................................................................................................. 259

xiv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template ................................................ 259 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Template Wide Conventions................................... 260 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Conventions...................................... 261 Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template.......................................... 262
VA Templates - Navigations as Pages ......................................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements ....................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Info Element.................................................................. 263 VA Templates - Logical Page Up and Down Elements ................................................ 263 VA Templates - List Box Page Up and Down Elements ............................................... 263

Program Preferences ......................................................................................265
Overview .............................................................................................................. 265 Preferences Dialog - Application tab .................................................................... 265
Startup ........................................................................................................................ 265 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. 266 Warning Messages ...................................................................................................... 266

Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab ................................................................... 267
Window ....................................................................................................................... 267 Grid ............................................................................................................................. 268 Transparency ............................................................................................................... 268

Preferences Dialog - Directories tab..................................................................... 269
Default Directories ...................................................................................................... 269

Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab ............................................................. 270 Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab .................................................................... 271
Undo / Redo Support .................................................................................................. 271

Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files............................................ 272 Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files ........................................... 272 Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program .......................... 273 Customizing the Menus and Toolbars................................................................... 274 Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................................... 274
Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars.......................................................................... 274 Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars ................................................................. 275 Associating an Icon With a New Command................................................................. 275 Creating a New Custom Toolbar ................................................................................. 276 Renaming Custom Toolbars ........................................................................................ 276 Deleting Custom Toolbars........................................................................................... 277

Customizing the Menus ........................................................................................ 277
Adding Commands To Existing Menus........................................................................ 277 Removing Commands From Existing Menus ............................................................... 277 Creating a New Custom Menu .................................................................................... 278

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xv

Table of Contents

Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu ...................................... 279 Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) ......................................................................... 280
Setting Custom Hotkeys.............................................................................................. 280

xvi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)
Overview
The TPDesign4 (or "TPD4") Touch Panel Design program is designed to assist you in creating a state-of-theart touch panel interface for AMX's G4 Level touch panels (including the Modero line, MIO-R4 remote controllers, and the NXP-TPI/4 Touch Panel Interface). Use TPD4 to create Project Files (*.TP4) containing all of the information required to define a user-interface to be utilized on a G4 touch panel. This includes Pages, Popup Pages and associated navigation/page-flip information, as well as buttons (including function code information), and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design (including dynamic images and video feeds).

What's New in Version 2.11
Support for Dynamo Resource Images on the following panel-types: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i

Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements
Supported Operating Systems
Windows 2000® (service pack 4 or greater) Windows XP® Professional (service pack 2 or greater) Windows Vista-Business You must have Power User (or Administrator) rights to install and run all required System files.

Supported Operating System Languages
Windows XP® Professional / Windows 2000®: • English (US) • French • German • Spanish Windows Vista-Business®: • Chinese (Classic, HK) • French • Japanese • Spanish • English • Chinese (Simplified, PRC) • Arabic • German • Turkish • Greek • Italian • Portuguese • Flemish (Dutch) • Russian • Turkish

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

1

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

PC Requirements/Recommendations
Pentium III 750MHZ processor (minimum requirement); 1.5GHz or faster recommended. 700 MB of free disk space (minimum requirement) 512 MB of RAM (minimum - SQL Server 2005 Express Edition requires 512MB) Minimum (VGA) screen resolution of 800x600. Windows-compatible mouse (or other pointing device). If the mouse wheel on your Microsoft® IntelliMouse® doesn't work with VA, try downloading the latest IntelliMouse drivers from Microsoft.

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions
Supported Panel Types
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) supports the following AMX (G4) touch panel types: Supported Panel Types
Name MVP-5100 MVP-5150 MVP-5200i MVP-7500 MVP-8400 MVP-8400i NXD-430 NXD-435 NXD-CV5 NXD-500i NXD/NXT-CV7 NXD-700vi NXD/NXT-CV10 NXT-CV10/PB NXD-1000vi NXD/NXT-CA12 NXD/NXT-CV12 NXD/NXT-1200V Description 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® IR Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Wi-Fi Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 7.5" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 7" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 7" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 10" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 10" Modero Table Top Touch Panel with Pushbuttons 10" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels 12" Modero® Video Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG5966-08) (FG5966-07) (FG5966-01) (FG5965-01) (FG5965-05) (FG5965-04) (FG2262-01) (FG2262-03) (FG2261-01) (FG2261-02) (FG2258-02K, FG2258-01K) (FG2258-04K) (FG2259-02K, FG2259-01K) (FG2259-03K) (FG2259-04K) (FG2251-10, FG2250) (FG2251-12K, FG2250-11K) (FG2251-60K, FG2250-60K) (FG225161RGB, FG2250-61V)

NXD/NXT-1200VG 12" Modero® VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels with RGB

2

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Panel Types (Cont.)
Name NXD/NXT-CA15 NXD/NXT-CV15 Description 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG2253-10, FG2252) (FG2253-12K, FG2252-11K) (FG2253-61V, FG2252-61V) (FG2256K, FG2257K) (FG2256-61V, FG2257-61V) (FG630-100) (FG2275-01) (FG2275-102, FG2275-104) (FG2275-112, FG2275-114) (FG148-04)

NXD/NXT-1500VG 15" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXD/NXT-CV17 17" Flush Mount & Table Top Color Video Touch Panels

NXD/NXT-1700VG 17" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXP-PLV NXP-TPI/4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI R-4 Modero PosiTrack Pilot Camera Controller NetLinx® Touch Panel Interface Total Presentation Interface, 2/4 Source Input Total Presentation Interface with DVI, 2/4 Source Input Mio R-4 Remote

The prefix " NXT" indicates the table-top (tilt) model, and "NXD" represents the wallmount version.

Supported Screen Resolutions
While most touch panels support a single screen resolution, the NXI-TPI/4, TPI-PRO, TPI-PRO-DVI and NXV-300 support multiple resolutions, selectable in the New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog. The screen resolution setting for these panel devices can be changed later via the Screen Size option in the Save As Different Panel Type dialog. Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions
Resolution 640x480 720x480 CEA 720x576 CEA 800x480 • MVP-7500 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO-DVI • MVP-5150 • MVP-5200i • CV5 • MVP-8400i • MVP-8400 800x600 • 1200V • 1200VG • 1500VG 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB • CA12 • CV12 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

3

11 or higher) .Pro Edition (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 • 1920x1200 4 TPDesign4 (v2.NXI-TPI/4 TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the NXI-TPI/4 (NetLinx Touch Panel Interface 4): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 Supported Screen Resolutions .11 or higher) Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions (Cont. Supported Screen Resolutions .TPDesign4 (v2.) Resolution 1280x720 VESA/CEA 1280x768 • TPI-PRO-DVI • 1700VG • CV17 • NXP-TPI4 1280x1024 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 1920x1080 VESA/CEA 1920x1200 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type TPD4 provides scrolling if a Design View is larger than the available visible work area.TPI-PRO TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface .

Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels Intercom-equipped Modero Panels support 2-way full-duplex intercom capabilities.TPDesign4 (v2.TPI-PRO-DVI TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface PRO with DVI (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 720x480 CEA • 720x576 CEA • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x720 VESA • 1280x720 CEA • 1280x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 VESA • 1920x1080 CEA • 1920x1200 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels Video Capable Modero Panels all support Composite video inputs. These include: NXT/NXD-CV7 NXD/NXT-CV10 NXD/NXT-CV10/PB NXT/NXD-CV12 NXT/NXD-CV15 NXT/NXD-CV17 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels Video capable Enhanced Modero Panels all support Composite.11 or higher) Supported Screen Resolutions . it also supports Composite video (only). Component/RGB and Streaming video inputs. These include: NXT/NXD-1200V (Composite only) NXT/NXD-1200VG NXT/NXD-1500VG NXT/NXD-1700VG While the NXT/NXD-1200V panel is considered to be part of the enhanced Modero family of Panels.11 or higher) 5 . These panels include: MVP-5200i MVP-8400i NXD-1000vi NXD-700vi TPDesign4 (v2.

The TTF files listed represent those TTF files installed in Windows with their available point sizes. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. Refer to the NetLinx Studio online help and Instruction Manual for instructions.TPDesign4 (v2. 6 TPDesign4 (v2. Unless you are actually using transparency. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details.com. TPD4 directly utilizes TTF files.11 or higher) . This list will be updated as support for Dynamo Resource Images is added to new and existing panels: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i True Type Font Support Since G4 panels have the ability to decode and display Windows True Type Font files (TTF). NetLinx Studio is available for free download from www.amx.11 or higher) AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images The following list indicates the AMX Touch Panels that support Dynamo Resource Images (at the time of this TPDesign4 release).com: NetLinx Studio NetLinx Studio is a full featured Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for NetLinx and Axcess Control Systems.amx. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. Related Software Applications The related AMX software applications described in the following sections are available to download from www. only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. Fonts are presented in the Properties Control window (States tab). as well as the Button Selection/Draw toolbar and the Add Page and Add Popup Page dialogs.

allows a user to download the selected installation files. TPD4 will prompt you to download the application from www. and upon request. For details on using G4 PanelBuilder to generate G4 PanelBuilder project files (*. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application. Use the set of options in the File menu to access the key functions of the G4 PanelBuilder application: Click File > New From G4 Panel Builder to create a new TP4 panel project using G4 PanelBuilder. returns a listing of available updates.11 or higher) AMX WebUpdate The AMX WebUpdate program is a stand-alone application that communicates with the AMX website. To preview your panel project. Click File > Export G4 PanelBuilder Template to export the active TP4 project as a PanelBuilder Template file (*. Refer to the WebUpdate on-line help for details and instructions. or user-designed templates. For example. using either pre-fabricated templates from AMX.VAT) into TPD4 as a starting point for your panel design. it is fully integrated with TPD4.TPT). If not found. the File > New From G4 PanelBuilder option (available only if G4 PanelBuilder is installed) launches the G4 PanelBuilder application to allow you to create a new TPD4 project.com. TPD4 is required to complete the project by specifying channel mapping information.com. allows a user to select from a list of available AMX Software programs to choose for updating.11 or higher) 7 .amx. G4 PanelBuilder G4 PanelBuilder is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to quickly create TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels.PB4). Although G4 PanelBuilder is installed separately. Note: The WebUpdate application is not installed by TPD4. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons.amx. TPDesign4 (v2. Select Help > Web Update to launch this application.TPDesign4 (v2. and must be installed separately. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. G4 PanelPreview G4 PanelPreview is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to preview TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. launches the installation of those downloads. determines the latest version of the selected applications. Click File > Import Touch Panel Template to import an existing PanelBuilder (*. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details.TPT) or Visual Architect template file (*. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. refer to the G4 PanelBuilder online help. The G4 PanelBuilder application is designed to do the bulk of the basic layout and navigational design of a touch panel design. and to generally fine-tune the project as needed.

11 or higher) .11 or higher) 8 TPDesign4 (v2.TPDesign4 (v2.

TPDesign4 (v2. Design View Windows . Panel. 1): Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbars Workspace Window Design View Windows Properties Window State Manager Window Status Bar FIG. These settings are saved. left to right.You can choose which toolbars to show in the workspace via the View > Toolbars submenu. Page.Lists the name of the active Project file. from top to bottom. then it is displayed. Button. and their pages and popup pages. These tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. and Help). Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. When this option is enabled. the main components are: Title Bar . Edit. then click in the checkboxes to select/de-select the listed toolbars (including custom toolbars). a tab is displayed for each open page.11 or higher) 9 . Toolbars .Contains the main menu options (File. 1 TPDesign4 Work Area In its default configuration.The TPDesign4 Work Area The TPDesign4 Work Area Overview The TPD4 work area consists of several main components (FIG.Each tabbed Design View Window represents a Touch Panel page or popup page. View. Note that a MDI tab is displayed for each opened page. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). so they'll apply the next time the application is launched. Window. Layout.Contains two tabs: The Pages tab contains a tree structure representing all open projects. Transfer. Click View. Menu Bar . Tools. If a toolbar has a check next to it in the sub-menu. States. Workspace Window . but can be moved. The Function Maps tab allows you to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. Use the Pages tabs to open/edit the pages / popup pages in each project.

10 TPDesign4 (v2. When this option is enabled. Top. a tab is displayed for each open page. They provide a canvas upon which you may place buttons of any size that will fit within the confines of the windows. panel revision. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. Width or Height properties. 3 Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (View toolbar) Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. but can be moved. button size. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open).11 or higher) . and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. and the States tab allows you to view/edit button state information. FIG.Displays each state of the selected button as a thumbnail image in this window. Popup pages are resizable through the Properties Window by adjusting their Left. Design Views that represent pages are not resizable. Address code. Feedback and Initial page file target information. Use the Zoom and Magnifier Window features to control the size of the view. but can be moved. Status Bar . you can click and drag to resize and position it manually. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. 3). Since Design View windows represent the pages on the panel themselves. 2 Design View windows The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs). Select the Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (in the View toolbar) to display function codes associated with each button (FIG. State Manager Window . you can set their size and dimensions manually by first enabling the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. Design View Windows Design View windows (FIG.Contains three tabs: the General tab allows you to view/edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. FIG. the Programming tab allows you view/edit programming-oriented properties. The status bar also indicates the status of your connection to the NetLinx Master.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Window . the Status Bar shows the current XY cursor position.By default. 2) represent pages or popup pages in the panel file you are creating. The State Manager window allows you to view/edit the various states of a selected button. Level code. Alternatively.

Use these tabs to easily flip from page to page. For example. once you have several pages open. most 21” monitors typically have between a 19. you must first specify the monitor’s visible size (in the Monitor Size field of the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog). only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). Zoom controls do not affect the actual size of the selected object. these page tabs are referred to as "MDI tabs". containing options that allow you to select which state of a selected button to display in the Design View. 4 Zoom toolbar The following Zoom Controls are available via the Zoom toolbar: Full Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to show the entire page at 100% size. Right-click inside any of the page tabs to access the MDI Page tabs context menu. only the way it is represented in the workspace area. Using the Zoom Controls The Zoom toolbar (FIG. Design View Window tab controls Each panel page that you open is shown in its own Design View window for editing.5” and 20” viewable area.The TPDesign4 Work Area TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. No data will be lost. This menu is identical to the Layout menu. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. To use this option. only the view is closed. etc). If you open more than 10 pages. align.11 or higher) 11 . Actual Size: Automatically adjusts the zoom to represent how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the target panel type. TPD4 displays up to a maximum of 10 page tabs. accessible from the main menu bar. In TPD4. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. If you open more than 15 pages. By default. 4) contains shortcuts to the main Zoom Controls. and they can be toggled on/off via the View > MDI Page Tabs option. FIG. center. Select Display from the Design View context menu to access the Display sub-menu. The monitor size should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a full-screen image. Fit Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to fit inside the Design View window. each of these windows has its own page tab (normally appearing along the bottom edge of the Design View window area) that shows the Page name. click the Zoom Out and Zoom In toolbar buttons to adjust the display size of the selected object. Use these options to control the zoom factor on the selected page or popup page. Zoom Out/In: With a page or popup page selected. by the increments listed in the Zoom Control drop-down. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. the tabs automatically disappear. TPDesign4 (v2. containing options for layout/design control (send to front/back. Select Layout from the Design View context menu to access the Layout sub-menu. as opposed to the monitor’s overall diagonal size. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools.

75%. Custom: Opens the Custom Window Zoom dialog. Fit Height: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the height of the selected object inside the Design View window. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. 50%. For Width or Fit Height. 6 Workspace window 12 TPDesign4 (v2.The TPDesign4 Work Area Zoom Control Drop-down: Click the down-arrow to open the Zoom control options list. Select View > Magnifier Window (or click the toolbar button) to access the Magnifier Window. where you can select a zoom factor from 2 to 8 times actual size. 150%. 5 Magnifier Window toolbar button (View toolbar) Right-click inside the Magnifier window to access the Magnify Control context menu. Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus). 6): FIG. Magnifier Window The Magnifier window allows you to magnify a given area of a design view for temporary viewing in a separate floating window. Additional Zoom options are available via the Window > Zoom submenu: Fit Width: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the width of the selected object inside the Design View window. This floating window is resizable and dockable. 100%. Use this list to manually set the zoom to by incremental percentages (25%. 200% or 400%). without zooming the entire design view. where you can specify any zoom percentage within the range of 25 . and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page.11 or higher) . FIG.400% (in 1-percent increments). or by Fit Page.

7): FIG.The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Navigator . Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. These folders represent Popup Page Groups. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information).Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time. Each open Project is represented by a folder. Click the + symbol next to the folders.11 or higher) 13 . In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders.Pages Tab Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. 7 Workspace Navigator . each one with a different colored panel icon (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. in the Workspace Navigator.

Level codes. Programming and States: 14 TPDesign4 (v2. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page.11 or higher) .Function Maps Tab This list is sorted by Port. popup page and button properties. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. 8 Workspace Window. FIG. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window (FIG. 8). If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file.The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Window. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. and the button type is general. and within Port by Code.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. Address codes. Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. the selected button is named "pause". The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window.

The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type (in this case. When you release the mouse button. With an item selected. click on an item in the right column to activate that field for editing. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. and drag it to another field. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. TPDesign4 (v2. the value is copied to the new location. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. and the original value is left unchanged. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. select from a drop-down menu. 9). FIG.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types (FIG. 9 Properties Control . General buttons).General Tab To edit any of the listed button properties.11 or higher) 15 . or the Page itself). or both.

11 or higher) . 16 TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. With an item selected. similar to the General tab.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button (FIG. or the Page itself). or both. the value is copied to the new location. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). and drag it to another field.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . select from a drop-down menu. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. 10). Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. 10 Properties Control . General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. and the original value is left unchanged. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected.Programming Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. When you release the mouse button. FIG. This information is displayed in a table format.

TPDesign4 (v2. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. similar to the General tab. or the Page itself). 11). click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.States Tab To edit any of the listed button properties.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . 0. the value is copied to the new location. FIG. you can either set the item manually. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. and drag it to another field.States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button (FIG. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. select from a drop-down menu. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). or both. 11 Properties Control . the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. This information is displayed in a table format. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. Depending on the item selected.11 or higher) 17 . and the original value is left unchanged. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. When you release the mouse button. With an item selected. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms.

All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. and you select more than one button to act on. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. provided that the change can be applied to them all. These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. When you have multiple buttons selected. 12 Apply To All toggle button If the Apply To All button is not depressed.11 or higher) .The TPDesign4 Work Area Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All toggle button is located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (FIG. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. 12). FIG. and the Apply To All button is not depressed (in its active state). The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. 18 TPDesign4 (v2. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. but not on multiple states for a single button. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously.

Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). For Multi-General buttons. Copy. TPDesign4 (v2. The user will be able to set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. the different states (up to 256) are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up in the States tab). select View > State Manager. which includes options to add single or multiple states. For buttons with multiple states. replace states. in the Properties Control window (States tab). and remove states. the level will directly reflect the displayed state. To display the State Manager window. insert single or multiple states. When the button is turned back off. The State Manager window allows the viewing and modification of individual states. Insert. Double-click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to view/edit the properties for the selected state. 13). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states. Select a Page. FIG. some visual distortion may occur. which includes options to Add single or multiple states. Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities.11 or higher) 19 . popup page or button to be set. Popup page or button to view the state or states associated with it. Delete. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. and back again to Off (Range Time Down in the States tab). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. Right mouse click on any thumbnail to open the State Manager context menu. the states will be displayed in reverse order. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager window The State Manager is typically located along the bottom edge of the screen (although it is a dockable window and you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit the various states of a selected button (FIG. Each state of the selected button is displayed as a thumbnail image in this window. 13 State Manager window The State Manager interacts with the Properties Control window to allow the visual aspects of a page. For Multi-Bargraph buttons. Note that because the thumbnails displayed in the State Manager window are scaled versions of the button images. and does not represent distortion on the button itself. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. Replace states. and supports full Cut. This is only a result of the scaling. Send Commands can set the state number provided it is not a level type button.

Project . select a button state (thumbnail view). A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. and hold the mouse button down while dragging the selected state to another location in the State Manager window. or "Cancel". unless all states have been selected.11 or higher) . 14).This column indicates the name of the Project to which the files belong. or after the last state is disallowed. Device . prior to the first state. Right mouse click anywhere in the Transfer Status Window to open the Transfer Status context menu. 14 Transfer Status Window This window displays the following data for each transfer: Status . and the overall status of the transfer. and for transferring TP4 files to the panels.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu To access the State Manager Drag-and-Drop menu. For all other button types: A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state will execute a replace operation. FIG. Note that this context menu is identical to the Transfer Menu.The status bars indicate the progress of each file in the transfer. prior to the first state. the status of which is displayed in the Transfer Status window. A right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state presents a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Copy over…".This column gives the Device # and a description of the target/source device. A right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. The contents of the Drag-and-Drop menu change depending on the type of button selected: For Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph Buttons: A left mouse button drag-and-drop over a state executes a replace operation. "Move…". or after the last state executes a move operation. or after the last state will present a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Insert copy…". containing options for establishing a connection to the NetLinx Master and panels. accessible through the main menu bar: 20 TPDesign4 (v2. A left mouse button drag-and-drop between states. "Move…". "Insert copy…". prior to the first state. which may be docked/undocked from the main application window (FIG. or "Cancel". Transfer Status Window The Send To Panel and Receive From Panel dialogs place the requested transfer into a queue.

and Feedback (FIG. 17): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. In the default view. Ch: Displays the Channel code (port number:channel code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. In the secondary view. 15): FIG. it shows the current Cursor position. Lvl: Displays the Level code (port number:level code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 16 Status Bar . The default view. Loc: Displays the X-Y location of the button that the cursor is over (relative to the upper-left corner of the button). 0. Add: Displays the Address code (port number:address code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 16): FIG.11 or higher) 21 . All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Double-click anywhere on the status bar to view this secondary position. and (for the button the mouse is over): Location. Size: Displays the size of the button that the cursor is over. The Status Bar also indicates connection status as follows (FIG.secondary view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. 17 Status Bar . Size. Address code and Level code (FIG.connection status TPDesign4 (v2.default view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. 15 Status Bar . and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. FbBk: Displays the type of feedback associated with the button that the cursor is over. and the secondary view which is available via a double-click anywhere inside the status bar.The TPDesign4 Work Area Status Bar There are two views available for the status bar (located along the bottom edge of the application window). it shows the current Cursor position. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0.

Disable Mute Push FIG. This window includes three command buttons: Click the Disable button to disable the button preview.The TPDesign4 Work Area Button Preview Window Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. 18). Button Preview is not available for Joystick or Listbox Buttons. the Button Preview window is fully dockable. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. 18 Button Preview window The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Click to Mute any sounds associated with this button.11 or higher) . but initially it opens undocked. for multi-state buttons). Like the other windows in TPD4. Click on the button in the Button Preview window to "push" the button in an identical fashion to utilizing the Push command button. Right-click inside the preview area of the Button Preview window to access the Button Preview context menu. Click again to enable the preview. Click the Push button to simulate a push on the selected button. but not close the Button Preview window. This allows you to visually preview the On/Off states (and all states in between. 22 TPDesign4 (v2.

This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows To move the windows. click on the title bar and drag and drop the window into place. Zoom In . click on the bottom-left corner of the window border in the area shaded with parallel diagonal lines and drag the corner in any direction. Select or de-select each window to toggle by checking or un-checking the window listings in this menu (checked = window is on/ displayed).Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page . the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print . double-click inside the window's title bar. or along the edges of other docked windows. The printed output maintains a constant scaling factor across all pages. TPDesign4 (v2.Zooms out from the page view Close . Working With Dockable Windows All windows in TPD4 are fully dockable.Prints the current page view Next Page . To resize the windows.Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC. drag the window to reposition it next to any border or window frame and the window will automatically snap to the nearest border. click on any border and drag the border either vertically or horizontally. To dock these windows.The TPDesign4 Work Area Print Preview Window Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. Properties Control. or along the edge of another dockable window. Dockable windows automatically snap into place once they are positioned near an available docking area (along the edges of the application window. bottom. They automatically snap to the top. as they will appear when printed.11 or higher) 23 . Dockable windows can be re-arranged within the application window. The dockable windows in TPD4 are: Design View Properties Control Workspace Navigator State Manager Transfer Status Window Button Preview Magnifier Window Moving. with the image centered on the printed page. To dock/undock a window. right or left side of the application window. Toggling the Windows Each of the dockable windows (Design View. To stretch the windows. State Manager and Button Preview windows) can be toggled on/off via the options in the View menu.Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page . Workspace Navigator.Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out .Toggles the page view to one or two pages.

11 or higher) .The TPDesign4 Work Area 24 TPDesign4 (v2.

11 or higher) 25 . Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. DealerID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. Click Finish to close the wizard. select File > New. FontSize: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size.Using the New Project Wizard Using the New Project Wizard Overview The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). If you close the wizard after step 1. 3. PurchaseOrder: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field.Step 2) contains fields for System-Generated File Names. and consists of up to three dialogs: 1. The last dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . The initial page is listed under the Pages folder. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. Every project created will have at least one page. click Cancel. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font. note that the new project appears in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. Fill out this information and click Finish to exit the New Project Wizard. SalesOrder: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. Name: Enter a name for the page. The next dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . You can change the target panel type for any existing panel file via the File > Save as Different Panel Type option. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. To launch the New Project Wizard. To cancel the wizard at any point in the process.Step 1) contains fields to allow you set up the basics of your new project. Job Name: Enter a name for the new project.. JobComments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. Resolution: Click the down-arrow to select the target resolution for the project. The New Project Wizard is by its nature self-explanatory and intuitive. and has the edit focus. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. 2.Final Step) contains fields for setting up the initial touch panel page in the project. TPDesign4 (v2. If the Use System Generated File Names option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. You can add pages manually via the Panel > Add Page command. When you finish the New Project Wizard. The first dialog to appear (New Project Wizard .) to open the Colors dialog. you will have created a project with a single page. FileRevision: Enter the Revision in this field. from a list of all available fonts on your PC. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. complete with a start page..

New Project Wizard . Select the desired external button layout from the drop-down list (MIO R-4 only). complete with a start page. New Project Wizard . The External Button Options and Panel Resolution selections cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. To change either of these. use the Save As Different Panel Type option (File Menu) 26 TPDesign4 (v2.Step 1 dialog The options in this dialog include: Job Name: Enter a name for the new project.11 or higher) . To launch the New Project Wizard.Step Two dialog 3. the extension is provided with the associated resolution (not all resolutions require an extension). The New Project Wizard consists of up to three dialogs: 1. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project.Step One dialog 2. This invokes the first of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. Resolution: If the Panel Type selected supports multiple screen resolutions (such as the TPIs and NXV-300). The External Button Option selected here is represented in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog. CEA etc.Step 1 dialog To launch the New Project Wizard (to create a new TPD4 Project).). 19). to support transport and Teletext keypads.Final Step dialog New Project Wizard . select File > New. FIG. New Project Wizard .Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard dialogs The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). External Button Options: MIO-R4 remotes support multiple external button options. click the down-arrow to select a target resolution for the project. 19 New Project Wizard . Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. select File > New. To cancel the wizard at any point in the process. click Cancel. If the selected panel type supports resolution extensions (VESA.

Dealer ID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field.11 or higher) 27 . The options in this dialog include: Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. 20). File Revision: Enter the File Revision identifier in this field.Step Two dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard . this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. FIG. Sales Order: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. Job Comments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. Purchase Order: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields.Step 2 dialog If the "Use System Generated File Names" option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected.Step One dialog to access the second of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . 20 New Project Wizard . TPDesign4 (v2. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name.

.) to open the Colors dialog. Font Size: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. 21 New Project Wizard .Final Step dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard .11 or higher) . from a list of all available fonts on your PC.Final Step dialog The options in this dialog allow you to set up the initial touch panel page in the project: Name: Enter a name for the page. 28 TPDesign4 (v2..Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font. FIG.Step Two dialog to access the third of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. 21).

11 or higher) 29 . if the selected panel type features external pushbuttons). Inappropriate File Name Characters Avoid using the following characters when naming TPD4 project files: Inappropriate File Name Characters • Vertical Bar • Question Mark • Asterisk • Less Than Sign • Greater Than Sign • Forward Slash • Back Slash • Double Quotes • Colon • Period | ? * < > / \ " : . including pages and popup pages and associated navigation/page-flip information. Project Files contain all of the information required to define the user-interface that is displayed on the touch panel. Refer to the Using the New Project Wizard section on page 25 for details. TPD4 will automatically truncate the name to 59 characters. TPD4 has a limit of 59 characters for the project name/filename. buttons including function code information. Simply fill in the fields in each New Project Wizard dialog. At this point. Click the Finish button in the last dialog in the wizard to close the wizard.TP4) Overview TP4 Project (or Panel) files are created in the folder specified in the application preferences. To launch the New Project Wizard. Each page / popup page name must be unique within their respective panel files in order to be accepted by the program. TPDesign4 (v2. and click Next to proceed to the next dialog. When creating a new Project file. and is ready for you to start adding pages. Creating a New Project TPD4 includes a New Project Wizard. to quickly guide you through the process of setting up a new project. popup pages and buttons (including External Controls. or click the toolbar button.TP4) TPD4 Project Files (*. avoid using inappropriate file name characters.TPD4 Project Files (*. The New Project Wizard is designed to be simple and intuitive. and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design. If you try to save with a longer name. the project is created with one generic page. select File > New. All name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. unless you explicitly choose to save them in another location.

System-generated file names are generated automatically based on several fields that hold various types of project information (Designer. These fields are all optional. When you utilize System-Generated File Names.rev a.5678-9876. they are simply omitted from the file name. Use these fields to enter this additional information for this project. Dealer ID. the resulting filename for this project file consists of each of these entries separated by commas. and Revision). All information entered in this dialog can be viewed/edited at any time via the Panel Properties dialog.Step 2 dialog (System-Generated File Names) The resulting file name would be: "1234.My TP Project. If you leave any of the fields blank. 30 TPDesign4 (v2. if all fields are filled in as shown in FIG.TP4" The Purchase Order field and the (optional) Job comments field are not incorporated into the generated filename. 22. Sales Order. For example. FIG. If you select not to use System-Generated File Names.11 or higher) . Purchase Order.Super-Dave Osborne.TP4) System-Generated Project File Names When you are creating a new Project. the file name will match the Job Name entered in the first dialog of the New Project Wizard. 22 New Project Wizard . you are given the option to use System Generated File Names (in the New Project Wizard dialog).TPD4 Project Files (*.

if you select the Name property (in the General tab of the Properties control window). For pages and popup pages.TP4) Edit Focus The page. any time you select a button in the Design View. since it is not a valid Address Port number .these errors are indicated by a TPD4 error dialog. edit focus is indicated in the Design View window with small red squares (with yellow outlines) on the edges of the selected button. and you perform a "Copy".TPD4 Project Files (*. "Page 2" has current Edit Focus FIG. 24 Button Edit Focus as Indicated In the Design View windows Buttons that do not currently have edit focus are displayed with selection handles that are black squares (with white outlines). For example. Button has Edit Focus Button does not currently have Edit Focus FIG. popup page. The Cut. Quick Input Select Quick Input from the Edit menu or Design View context menu to access the Quick Input sub-menu. FIG. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). TPDesign4 (v2. The Quick Input setting determines how typing directly into a Design View or into the State Manager will be handled: Current Property . you can just type and press the Enter key to enter a new button name for the selected button. For example. edit focus is indicated in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) by a small arrow at the lower-left corner of the icon for the selected page or popup page. This means the last thing selected (not necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows) has the edit focus. or button(s) that are the target for change actions are said to have the Edit Focus. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port".11 or higher) 31 . you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. 23 shows that "Page 1" has the edit focus. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties window. Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element which has the current edit focus.This setting redirects keyboard input to the currently selected property on the currently visible tab of the Properties Window (assuming one is selected). 23 Page Edit Focus as Indicated In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) For buttons. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry).

This means the last thing selected. bitmaps. it's undo/redo stack is flushed and is no longer available. For example. The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. text is will be applied to all states of the button selected in the Design View. Popup Page or Button section on page 205.This setting redirects keyboard input to the button Text property for all selected button states (in the States tab of the Properties Control window). 32 TPDesign4 (v2. The following actions may be undone/redone: Button Property Changes Page / Popup Page Renames Button Deletions / Cuts Button Creations / Pastes Page / Popup Page Deletions / Cuts Page / Popup Page Creations / Pastes State Deletions / Cuts State Creations / Pastes Copying/Cutting/Pasting images and sounds Cutting. Click to select one or more actions to be undone/redone. Copying/Pasting Pages . Selecting either option will immediately undo/redo the last action. Click the down-arrows to view a history list that lists up to 25 of the most recent actions.see the Copying/Pasting Popup Pages section on page 94 Copying/Pasting Buttons .TP4) The result of the keystroke will depend on the property selected. copied or pasted in TPD4. you can type and press the Enter key to enter new button text for the selected states. For instance. This means that each panel file that is open in the program maintains a separate undo/redo stack and manages this for the user. You may either click the Undo or Redo toolbar icons. which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows. Text . has the edit focus. or click Edit > Undo or Edit > Redo. The commands alter their text dynamically to indicate which action is next in the undo/redo list. Disabled . The ability to utilize these features effectively can greatly increase your productivity. therefore you may undo past a save if you so desire. If no states are selected.TPD4 Project Files (*. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. if you select several states on a Multi-State button (in the State Manager window). if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). and you perform a "Copy". even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. Once a panel file is closed.see the Copying/Pasting Pages section on page 81 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages .11 or higher) . Copying and Pasting There are several items that can be cut. These actions are independent of any file saves.see the Copying/Pasting States From a Page.Disables the Quick Input option. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window).see the Copying/Pasting Buttons section on page 110 Copying/Pasting States . Undo/Redo TPD4 supports full Undo / Redo functionality at the panel level.

Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. select Edit > Selection Tool. See the Supported Panel Types section on page 2 for details. using any of the following techniques: 1. TPDesign4 (v2. or click the toolbar button in the Selection/Button Draw Toolbar (FIG. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). either select another button. When using the Selection Tool. FIG. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. Working With Video Fills If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. In the Properties Control window.11 or higher) 33 . TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodates up to four video source inputs. 25 Selection Tool Use the Selection tool to pick/select objects in the Design View window(s). you can assign a "video fill" to a page. 3. You can also select multiple buttons. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). 4. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. When using the Selection Tool. 25). as opposed to clicking on the item. To de-select a button. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). With an item selected in a Design View window. or left-click on the background of the page or popup page. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. popup page or button. you may turn the Apply To All toggle button (located at the bottom of the Properties Control window) On.TPD4 Project Files (*. 2. Using the Selection Tool To activate the Selection tool. then individually select each desired button. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. since it is not a valid Address Port number (these errors are indicated by an error dialog).TP4) If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window. The NXP-TPI/4. Left click on the remaining desired buttons while simultaneously depressing the Shift key on your keyboard. You may perform a marquis selection by holding down the left mouse button outside the boundaries of the desired buttons and drawing a selection box around the desired buttons.

You can also drag and drop TPDesign3 (*. Designer. each panel will support all or part of the following properties at the panel level: Project Information tab: Includes basic project information such as Job Name. to open the file via the TPD Conversion Wizard. Dealer ID. Panel Strings (Startup. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. AMX IR Receivers and User (non-AMX) IR Emitters. Motion Sensors.TPD) project files into the workspace. Power-up and Inactivity Settings and Feedback Blink Rate.TP4) Drag and Drop Support Project Files: Drag and drop TPD4 project files (*. Created with Build Number.amx. Job Comments. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. Using G4 PanelPreview To preview your panel project. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details. Dragging a Popup Page onto another Popup Page is not supported. This is a multi-tab dialog allowing you to view and edit the target touch panel's properties. the Use system generated filenames option and Protection options with Password fields. Panel Setup Information tab: Includes touch panel setup options including Refresh Frequency. Revision. Wakeup and Sleep). Sensors tab: Includes Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. Marquee Speed. Revision Date. File Name. 34 TPDesign4 (v2. Popup Pages: Popup Pages can be dragged from the Pages tab and dropped on a Design View as an alternate method of displaying the Popup Page on the full sized Page.com. Depending upon the panel selected. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons. Creation Date. Purchase Order. Setting Project Properties Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application.TPD4 Project Files (*. IR Emitters and Receivers tab: Includes Channel Port information for AMX IR Emitters. Last save date. Sales Order.TP4) from a Windows Explorer window onto the TPD4 workspace to open the project.11 or higher) . Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors.

This editable field displays the current Dealer ID (identifier) associated with this project. The options in this tab include: Job Name . Dealer ID . These items represent the various components of the System-Generated File Name.Project Information tab The information in this tab was set up when the project was created.This editable field displays the current Purchase Order (identifier) associated with this project.This editable field displays the current Sales Order (identifier) associated with this project. Purchase Order . Created . Sales Order .This read-only field displays the last date on which this project was saved (and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project). TPDesign4 (v2. 26).This editable field displays the current Designer associated with this project. Designer ID . and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project. 26 Project Properties dialog . in the New Project Wizard.This editable field displays the current Job Name associated with this project.TPD4 Project Files (*. these fields will be blank.This read-only field displays the creation date for this project.This editable field displays the current Revision (identifier) associated with this project.11 or higher) 35 . Modified . FIG.TP4) Project Properties dialog . If the Use System-Generated File Names option was not selected. File Revision .Project Information tab Use the options in the Project Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit project information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG.

the word "[Locked]" appears immediately to the right of the project name in the Workspace Navigator. locked .Use this text field to confirm the password by re-typing the password exactly as it was entered in the Password field.this is the default setting (no password protection).TPD4 Project Files (*. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. this information will be added on the next save. If system-generated file names were not used for the project.TP4) Revision Date . the Enter Access Password dialog appears. Job Comments . and no edits are allowed.the next time this panel file is opened. Once the password has been typed.This read-only field displays the date of the current revision of this project. it must be re-typed in the Confirm text field. If the project was originally set up to use system-generated file names. Protection . read-only . If the passwords don't match.11 or higher) . then selecting this option will replace the original information with the updated information from this dialog. files opened as read-only cannot be saved to another file name.Click the down-arrow to select one of three levels of password protection for this project file: none . Password . click on the Read-Only command button (in the Enter Access Password dialog). These protection options are not Windows file attributes. Confirm . a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed. 36 TPDesign4 (v2. prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. File Name . Also. Use System Generated File Names for This Project .This read-only field displays the full path and disc filename of the project.Click this option to apply system-generated filenames to this project. and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application.This editable field displays any comments that were added in the New Project Wizard.the next time the panel file is selected to open.259 characters) to use if the file is set as either read-only or locked.Use this text field to enter the password (1 . To simply view the file (as read-only). the Enter Access Password dialog appears. If the file opened in read-only mode.

27 Project Properties dialog . if you entered "Hello!" for the Wakeup string. FIG.Sets the speed of motion for Marquee text. the programmer typically creates a buffer or adds a DATA_EVENT/STRING: handler for the device.Select the desired refresh frequency for the selected panel.11 or higher) 37 .Panel Setup Information tab This dialog identifies the panel for which this project is designed.Use these three fields to specify text strings to appear on the panel. Panel Strings . Marquee Speed . during these three conditions (Startup. then the master will pass the strings from the device. and indicates it's screen resolution.TPD4 Project Files (*. This will cause an RXON command to be sent to the device. Power Up/Inactivity Settings Power up page . In the case of MIO R-4 remotes.TP4) Project Properties dialog . The options in this tab include: Refresh Frequency . the panel will send this string to the NetLinx Master on wakeup. from the dropdown list of supported refresh frequencies (based on the selected panel/resolution). Click to select the initial startup page for the panel.Panel Setup Information tab Use the options in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit setup information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG. Wakeup and Sleep). the External Button Option selected is indicated as well.Click the down-arrow to view a drop-down list of all pages currently saved in this project. TPDesign4 (v2. In order to receive strings from a device. 27). For example.

Specify port allocation .The use of dynamic list tables with channel codes may require the designer to specify the ports and/or channels to be allocated on the panel.select to supply a specific port number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. 28 Project Properties dialog . 28): FIG. Motion Sensors.select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum channels required (default setting).Click the down arrow to select which page to flip to after the specified period of inactivity (set on the touch panel). Feedback blink rate (10th of second) .If you are using blinking button feedback in your project.TP4) Power up popups .select to supply a specific channel number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. These options include: Automatically calculate port allocation . a text field is provided for you to manually enter the channel number. Specify channel allocation .TPD4 Project Files (*. use this field to specify the blink frequency.This field indicates the Power-Up popup pages that will appear over the Power up page. Device Port/Channel Allocation . Automatically calculate channel allocation .Sensors tab Use the options in the Sensors tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors. Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors associated with the active panel file (FIG.Sensors tab 38 TPDesign4 (v2. if the ports/channels utilized in the dynamic table(s) will exceed those declared in the project. Inactivity page .select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum ports required (default setting).11 or higher) . Project Properties dialog . in 1/10th-second increments (default = 5). a text field is provided for you to manually enter the port number to be allocated. When this option is selected. When this option is selected.

Use these fields to specify the Level port/code assignments for the on-board battery charger. AMX 455KHz IR emitting and receiving. Battery Levels . and up to two user-defined ports for IR emitting using custom IR files (FIG. Project Properties dialog .Use these fields to set the Channel port/code assignments for the Cradle Sensor on MVP panels. Motion Sensor .Use these fields to specify the Level and Channel port/code assignments for the onboard light sensor.TP4) Light Sensor . 29). 29 Project Properties dialog .IR Emitters and Receivers tab The NXD/T-CV7 have AMX IR receivers.IR Emitters and Receivers tab Use the options in the IR Emitters and Receivers tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit port information associated with the active panel file for AMX 38KHz IR emitting and receiving. and the MVP-7500/8400 and MVP-8400i have AMX and User-defined IR emitters as well as a cradle sensor (see below).Use these fields to specify the Channel port/code assignments for the on-board motion sensor.11 or higher) 39 . The channel will be turned on when the panel is docked (either in the tabletop docking station or in the wall cradle). FIG. Cradle Sensor (MVP panels only) .TPD4 Project Files (*. TPDesign4 (v2.

TPD4 Project Files (*. it cannot be saved under a new file name. The value associated with each port can be modified in-place. The password is not required to open and view the file. 40 TPDesign4 (v2. or re-confirm the password. Additional User IR Emitters (MVP-5220 & MVP-5200i) . Enter the password in the Password text field. a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed.TP4) The options in this tab include: AMX IR Emitters (MVPs only) . locked or none . Applying Password Protection to Your Project File TPD4 supports two levels of password protection for Project (. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. 30). The User IR Emitters table displays a grid of user IR ports and their respective values in two columns. If the password is not entered correctly.) 3. Re-type the password in the Confirm field.Password settings (Project Information tab. The edit field will only accept integer values ranging from zero to 100 (consistent with other port values). and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. in which case you'll need to re-enter the password. As with the original two user IR ports.see FIG. 30 Project Properties dialog .These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for AMX IR receiving for NXD/T-CV7 and NXD/TCV10 panels. all port values entered will be validated against other existing IR emitter or receiver port values to ensure that all non-zero IR port values are unique.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for user-defined IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels. Click the down-arrow next to Protection to select a level of password protection from the drop-down list (either read-only. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file.TP4) files: Read-only . These protection options are not Windows file attributes. Click Apply to save the changes and apply the specified password to the Project file. If the passwords don't match. 4.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for standard AMX IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels. AMX IR Receivers (CV7 and CV10s only) . the Enter Access Password dialog appears.These options allow you to use up to 8 IR Emitters with the panel. To apply password protection to the open Project file: 1. The default value for each port is zero (not used). User IR Emitters (MVPs only) .11 or higher) . Passwords can be from 1 to 259 characters in length.Project Information tab. 2.the next time this Project file is opened. the file will not be opened at all. 5. Values in the Port column cannot be edited. Applying changes made to the grid control will set the project's "dirty" flag. or both. Locked .the next time the panel file is selected to open. FIG. prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. Non-numeric values will be rejected and the value reset to zero. Note that if a read-only file is opened without using the password. Modifying values in the grid control will activate the Apply button as appropriate. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog .

Select the page that you want to be used as the Power-up page from this list (FIG. In the Panel Setup Information tab. 3.TPD4 Project Files (*. Select a popup page that you want to be displayed over the Power-up page from this list and click OK. presenting a list of all popup pages in the active Project (FIG. FIG. 4. 31). 32 Project Properties dialog . TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) Setting a Power Up Page Use the Power-up page option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is turned on: 1. In the Panel Setup Information tab. If you select more than one popup page. click the green Plus sign icon below the Power up popups field to invoke the Add Power Up Popup dialog. 32). To display multiple popups over the Power up page. you can specify the display order via the up/down arrow buttons below the Power up popups field. click the down arrow next to the Power up page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog.Power-up page settings (IR Emitters and Receivers tab) Setting Power Up Popup Pages Use the Power-up popups option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify one or more popup pages in your project to be displayed over the Power up page when the panel is turned on: 1. 2. FIG. repeat steps 2 and 3 to select another popup. 31 Project Properties dialog .Power-up popups settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3. The selected popup page is indicated in the Power up popups field.11 or higher) 41 . Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. The popup at the top of the list is the first to be displayed. 2.

Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. Click Apply to apply this change.TPD4 Project Files (*. In the Panel Setup Information tab.11 or higher) . 33 Project Properties dialog . click the Remove Popup (X) button below the Power up popups field. Select the page that you want the panel to flip to when the panel is inactive for the amount of time specified on the panel. You can use the Inactivity Page Flip option to create a "screen-saver" for the panel as part of your project. Setting an Inactive Page Flip Use the Inactive Page Flip option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is inactive for a specified period of time: 1. 42 TPDesign4 (v2. 5. FIG.Inactivity Page settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3.TP4) To remove a popup from the Power up popups list. click the down arrow next to the Inactivity Page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project (FIG. 33). 2.

and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information).Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. There are several actions that you can do simply by selecting an item in the tree and choosing the appropriate command or toolbar button: Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window Renaming Pages via the Workspace Window Drag and Drop Support TPDesign4 (v2.all tabs Workspace Window .TP4) Using the Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus).11 or higher) 43 . 34): FIG. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. Each open Project is represented by a folder. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time. 34 Workspace Navigator . Click the + symbol next to the folders. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. in the Workspace Navigator. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. These folders represent Popup Page Groups. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. each one with a different colored panel icon: Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages.TPD4 Project Files (*.

displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window. This list is sorted by Port.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. 35).Pages tab (FIG.11 or higher) . Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window You can open a page or popup page in the active Project by double-clicking on the Page or Popup Page in the Workspace Window . and within Port by Code. 35 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window 44 TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) Workspace Window. FIG.TPD4 Project Files (*. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. Address codes. Level codes.

and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project.in this case. the value is copied to the new location. Depending on the item selected. or both. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. 36 Properties Window To edit any of the listed button properties. select from a drop-down menu. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types.11 or higher) 45 . the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. General buttons. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type . TPDesign4 (v2. and the original value is left unchanged. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. Programming and States (FIG. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). When you release the mouse button.TPD4 Project Files (*. and drag it to another field. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. you can either set the item manually.TP4) Using the Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. Properties Window . FIG. 36). or the Page itself). and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. popup page and button properties. With an item selected.

When this option is enabled. Working With Multiple Projects TPD4 supports working on multiple projects simultaneously.11 or higher) . This information is displayed in a table format. FIG. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). a tab is displayed for each open page. Copying/Pasting Across Projects TPD4 allows you to copy and paste pages. Page Flip Options. but can be moved. Channel and Level codes). toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs).Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button. including all of their various attributes across projects. popup pages and buttons across projects to save time and effort.TP4) Properties Control . with a few limitations: Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously Each project page has its own tab along the bottom of the Design View window (known as MDI Page Tabs). This information is displayed in a table format. TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. If you open more than 15 pages. popup page or button you want to retain in the target project. popup pages and buttons.States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. similar to the General tab. 37). 37 Paste Controls dialog 46 TPDesign4 (v2. popup page or buttons are pasted into a separate project (FIG. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). You can copy/paste pages. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the page. and there are a few key points to keep in mind in doing so: Use the Paste Controls dialog to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address. similar to the General tab.TPD4 Project Files (*. Properties Control . Give some thought to which elements of the page. 0. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. This can obviously be a major time saver. This a powerful tool.

However. Edit > Paste. the Copy toolbar button (). click to select the target project (the one that you want to paste the page or popup page into). Once the migration process is complete and the project file has been saved. Using the TPD Conversion Wizard TPDesign4 includes a TPD Conversion Wizard tool that makes it easy to convert your existing TPDesign3 files for use with TPDesign4. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the copied buttons are pasted into a page in a separate project. Page Flip Options. and Copy (use Ctrl+C. Edit > Copy.e. Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4) If a TP4 project file created with a previous version of TPD4 is opened (File > Open). you can specify the target resolution for the project. the Project Migration dialog appears.Select a Source & Destination (Step 1 of 3) dialog. in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). If you copy/paste a page or popup page containing buttons. those elements are copied into the target project along with the page. and Paste (use Ctrl+V. NXP-TPI4. For example. Retain slot references and Retain sound references are all selected in the Paste Controls dialog).TPD4 Project Files (*. Copying/Pasting Pages. If you selected a panel that supports multiple resolutions (i. c. Step 1 of 3 (Select Source and Destination): In the TPD Conversion Wizard . or select Copy from the Workspace Navigator context window). Pages and Popup pages are automatically pasted into the correct folders. Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 TPDesign4 is backward-compatible with TPDesign3. Click Yes to continue. b. for use with G4 panels. A description and image of the selected panel is displayed. The TPD Conversion Wizard steps you through the conversion process in three dialogs: 1. you will see a Pre-Conversion warning TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) When you copy/paste across projects. prompting you to continue with the migration process. icons and sounds that came over with the pasted buttons are available in the Resource Manager for the target project. via the Open dialog).11 or higher) 47 . 3. TPI-PRO. In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). popup pages and/or buttons contain bitmaps. Once the buttons are pasted into the target project. Channel and Level codes). Select File > Save As Different Panel Type to launch the TPD Conversion Wizard. 2. the buttons are copied along with the page. Click Cancel to abort the file open command. once the conversion process is applied. TPI-PRO-DVI). select the TPD project file that you want to convert (use the browse button to navigate to the desired file. Step 2 of 3 (View Warnings and Substitute Fonts): The TPD Conversion Wizard . if the selected pages. Open the Paste Control Options dialog (Button > Paste Controls) to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address.Warnings & Font Substitution (Step 2 of 3) dialog in the wizard contains two read-only text fields: The Pre-Conversion Warnings list box alerts you to any possible conflicts that will exist in the selected file. popup page or button (assuming that Retain image references. or select Paste from the Workspace Navigator context window). this process will not have to be performed again. a. the bitmaps. 2. then save the file. the Paste toolbar button. icons and/or sounds. You don't have to actually open a page to copy it: simply select the desired page with a single click in the Workspace Navigator window and copy the page. project files that were created in TPDesign3 must be converted in order to be compatible with TPDesign4. Click Next to proceed. if the target panel/resolution differs from the original target of the TPDesign3 file. Popup Pages and Buttons Across Projects: 1. Click to select the source page or popup page (the one that you want to copy to another project). Click the down arrows next to Panel Type and Resolution to specify the target G4 panel for the project file.

and the target panel/resolution. Click Finish to launch the conversion process and open the Errors and Warnings Report dialog where you can view/fix the resulting warnings. Neither errors nor warnings will prevent the file from being compiled. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. 4.Final Step dialog. 4. 3. Select File > New to launch the New Project Wizard (New Project Wizard . The bottom text box lists all Warnings encountered during the conversion process.Finish (Step 3 of 3) dialog lists the selected file. Select R-4 as the Panel Type. the original panel/resolution association. but will probably require that the issues be resolved in order to have buttons and pages that look and function as expected. you can select a substitute font to use instead.Step Two dialog. and can be customized as External Controls. 5. but that are not available to TPDesign4 (i. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . are not currently installed on your PC). The lower list box indicates any fonts that were specified in the original TPDesign3 file. When the TPD file is converted and opened in TPD4. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . Step 3 of 3 (Finish): The TPD Conversion Wizard . If all fonts used in the original file are still available. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. The Errors and Warnings reports are displayed in the Errors and Warnings Report dialog. When you convert a TPDesign3 project to a TPDesign4 project via the TPD Conversion Wizard.e. Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers The process of creating a TPD4 project for R-4 remote controllers is essentially the same as for any other panel type. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired.11 or higher) . As with the panel resolution. Click Filter Warnings to select which warning messages to display or suppress via the Filter Conversion Warnings dialog. 48 TPDesign4 (v2.TPD4 Project Files (*. The pushbuttons on R-4 remotes are treated in TPD4 the same as external pushbuttons on any other panel type. the pages and popup pages may appear in a different order than they occurred in TPDesign3.TP4) message indicating that scaling will occur. Warnings are issues that represent potential visual/formatting problems. usually because there are button or buttons in the project that are smaller than the minimum size of the selected border. The display area on R-4 remotes is 240 X 320 (pixels).Step 1) dialog. Select an External Button Option from the drop-down list. Errors are issues that result in unexpected button borders. 2. The conversion wizard handles most of these issues for you automatically. with a few caveats: 1. R-4 Remote Controller Projects AMX R-4 Remote Controllers feature a color LCD touch screen that can be programmed and customized like any other touch panel type. For each unmatched font listed. 3. like minor shifts in shape and size on some buttons. TPDesign4 generates a report that lists errors and warnings relating to the conversion process. since TPD4 sorts the page and popup pages alphabetically. the message "No unmatched fonts" is displayed.

R-4 Setup Codes Levels: R-4 Setup Codes . TakeNote. and Text Input buttons are not supported by R-4 remote controllers. All button types continue to be available in the Drawing Toolbar. However. TPD4 will display an error message if you attempt to add an unsupported button type in an R-4 project. ready for you to: Set Page Properties and add Pages (note that the display area on R-4 remotes is 240x320 pixels).11 or higher) 49 .Unsupported Button Types Computer Control.10.Addresses • Time Display: • Date Display: Selected Format Selected Format These setup codes apply to R-4 firmware versions beginning with version 2.TP4) 6.Levels • Mesh: • Mesh: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: Current TX Link Quality Current RX Link Quality Signal Strength Row 1 Signal Strength Row 2 Signal Strength Row 3 Signal Strength Row 4 Signal Strength Row 5 Signal Strength Row 6 Addresses R-4 Setup Codes .TPD4 Project Files (*. TPDesign4 (v2.61. Select Finish to close the New Project Wizard. the initial page is opened in the Design View. R-4 Remote Devices . Add Buttons and Popup Pages Set General. Programming and States properties for Buttons Pages Popup Pages (keep in mind that R-4 projects work just like any other panel type) Configure the external pushbuttons. and are not displayed in the Properties Window (when an R-4 project is active). At this point.

the options include: Default Configuration .for use with a standard MIO R-4.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. These defaults will not affect any existing R-4 projects. the External Button Options list is empty. 50 TPDesign4 (v2. If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons. "<none>". Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions .Default Channel Codes The default channel codes for R-4 external buttons match the corresponding G4 API values (defined in G4API.11 or higher) .e. i. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed).axi): R-4 External Buttons . If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons. Teletext keypad . R-4 External Buttons .Default Channel Codes Button MENU Up Down Left Right Select EXIT INFO GUIDE LAST G4 API CONSTANT BTN_MENU_FUNC BTN_MENU_UP BTN_MENU_DN BTN_MENU_LT BTN_MENU_RT BTN_MENU_SELECT BTN_MENU_EXIT BTN_MENU_INFO BTN_MENU_GUIDE BTN_TUNER_PREV Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 105 235 The default values are read in when a new project is created.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. Keypad with Transport Functions .TPD4 Project Files (*. As with the panel resolution.TP4) External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options.

39). 38 Resource Manager dialog This dialog contains features and options that allow you to easily organize and manage Images.Toolbar Depending on what you are doing with the listed Image. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. Dynamic Images: The Dynamic Images tab allows you to manage images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. FIG.11 or higher) 51 .MP3) to be used in your project. Dynamic Image or Sound files.WAV or . Sounds: The Sounds tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files (.Working With The Resource Manager Working With The Resource Manager Overview Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. one or more of the following options will be available: TPDesign4 (v2. 38). Slots and Sounds for your project. FIG. TPD4 supports most popular image formats. above the tabs (FIG. Slots: The Slots tab allows you to manage slot assignments for images and icons. The Resource Manager contains its own toolbar. 39 Resource Manager dialog . organized into four tabs: Images: The Images tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project. external to the panel.

you must select at least the same number of slots (in the Slots tab) in order to paste all of the files. Export: Use this option to export one or more files to a specified directory. Note that if you copy or cut multiple files to clipboard memory. List Style: Click the down-arrow to open a drop-down list of the available display options for this tab: Small Icons . you can toggle the display of this dialog either by selecting the "Don't show me again" checkbox in the dialog. Click to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. New: This option is available only on the Dynamic Images tab (and replaces the Import button that is on the other tabs). If you only select one slot. Use this dialog to locate and select image and sound files to import into this tab. when you paste the multiple images. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. List . If any of the files selected for deletion are used by the active project. with small file icons. displays the current file name).lists the files in a single column. Use the Choose Directory dialog to pick the target directory. with a listing of all files targeted for deletion. just from this project. By default. Import: Click to invoke the Open dialog. as well as the Page(s) on which each file is used. The files are not deleted from the hard drive. For this reason. Details . You can also cut/copy/paste within any of the tabs.Working With The Resource Manager Cut/Copy/Paste: Use these controls primarily to move images files to and from the Slots tab. When images of any (supported) file type except PNG are imported into a project. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is displayed. Delete: Select one or more files and click Delete to delete them from the collection. or by selecting "When deleting resources in use" in the Application tab of the Preference dialog. Undo/Redo: All actions in the Resource Manager can be undone and/or redone. Thumbnails . TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file.lists the files in columns.11 or higher) . and support selected multiple files. 52 TPDesign4 (v2. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is set to display any time a used resource is deleted. with small file icons.displays a thumbnail image of each file. However. containing two fields: Old Name (read-only. and New Name (enter the new file name in this field). Click OK to rename the file. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). which allows you to add dynamic images to your project. Rename: Select an image file and click Rename to open the Rename dialog. They work in the typical way. you'll only see the first one that you selected. the files are automatically converted to JPGs.lists the files with file size and image dimension descriptions.

Images tab The Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project (FIG. page background. etc). before they are applied in the project. Once the image has been imported. 40). Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected image file(s) to slot(s).11 or higher) 53 . it is available for selection to be applied to Pages. It is important to import all of your images to this tab first. FIG. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. Static Image Files Before you can apply images to buttons and pages in your Project.e. The Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all image files. 40 Resource Manager dialog . the image and sound files must first be imported into the Project via the Resource Manager dialog. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. buttons and icons). TPDesign4 (v2. button state. Popup pages or Buttons (at the state level). popup pages.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Images Resource Manager dialog . regardless of their context (i. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project.Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every image file that will be used in your project (for pages.

Locate and select the file(s) to import. Importing Image Files Into Your Project To import image files into your Project 1. Open the Images tab. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing images that have the same file name as the image selected for import. 54 TPDesign4 (v2. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Unless you are actually using transparency. If this option is selected. Click the Import button to invoke the Open dialog. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. 3. Click Open to import the files to the Images tab. only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. Notes on importing image files: When images of any supported file type (except PNG) are imported into a project. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors.11 or higher) . TPD4 supports most popular image formats. For this reason. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). This functionality works in an identical manner for sound files. 5. 4. it will replace the original image on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project.Working With The Resource Manager Consider assigning Slot positions to those image files that you expect to use multiple times in the Project. 2. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. anytime an image with a duplicate file name is imported. the files are automatically converted to JPGs. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. 6.

.Working With The Resource Manager The largest image size supported on the panels is 1280x1024. Any image files that are imported to the project that are larger than 1280x1024 are automatically scaled down to fit this maximum resolution. the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of.". TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 55 . If you import an image file that has already been imported to the Images tab. This is true even if the second version of the image file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. Any scaling that occurs is proportional.. so that the image will not be stretched.

Working With The Resource Manager Working With Dynamic Images Resource Manager dialog . The Dynamic Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all images. before they are applied in the project. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order.Dynamic Images tab The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project (FIG. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. It is important to import all of your dynamic images to this tab first. 41 Resource Manager dialog . popup pages. to replace the generic icon in this tab. Get Live File: Click to retrieve a thumbnail of the live feed. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. etc). Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected Image file(s) to slot(s). 41): FIG. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item.Dynamic Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every dynamic image file that will be used in your project (for pages. regardless of their context (i.e.11 or higher) . page background. button state. buttons and icons). 56 TPDesign4 (v2.

rather than a directory path to an image file. This can be any name you choose. File: Enter the File name for the image source. Password: Enter Password if desired (optional). or FTP. To use dynamic images in your project you'll specify a URL. Refresh Rate: Leave the Refresh Rate set to zero (default).States tab) to automatically scale (down only) the dynamic image to fit the button that it is being displayed on. 3. Open the Dynamic Images tab (FIG. This option is only displayed if the current panel type supports Dynamo Resource images (see the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6). Host: Enter the Host Name (URL) or IP Address of the image source. 41 on page 56). Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project To add dynamic image files to the Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog: 1. Click the New button to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. Click OK to add the file to the Dynamic Images tab. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. User: Enter User name if desired (optional). 42 Create Dynamic Image dialog 4. Refresh only at panel startup: Click to refresh this image only when the panel is powered up. FIG. Dynamic images can be applied to all button types except Computer Control and Text Area buttons.11 or higher) 57 . The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. 5. 42). Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Scale Bitmap To Fit state property (Properties Control window . Path: Enter the Path for the image source. external to the panel.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Images Dynamic Images are images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. 2. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for Dynamo Resource images only). try to give the file a descriptive name so that it can be identified easily later.

jpg The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: c. To provide the other information required in this dialog. e. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog.myspacecdn.jpg d. 4. go to the image that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager.com Path = images02/64 File = l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case. 58 TPDesign4 (v2.myspacecdn. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. In a web browser. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol. 3. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information.ac-images. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. but also protocol and path information as well. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this photo: http://c1. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog.11 or higher) .jpg The User and Password fields are left blank. 43).com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. At this point. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.ac-images. refer to the source image properties: a. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG.Adding a Dynamic Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image to the Resource Manager: 1. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. 2. b.ac-images. 43 Example Element Properties dialog As indicated in the drop-down example above.myspacecdn. it is not required as part of the Host. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Example . the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: c1. we'll use "Photo 1". Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. 44): Name = Photo 1 Protocol = HTTP Host = c1. FIG. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog.

f. This option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. 44 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog The Refresh Rate should be left to zero (default setting). the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. FIG. Click OK to add this image as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager (FIG. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. 45).11 or higher) 59 . 45 Example Dynamic Image TPDesign4 (v2.

and a select number of AMX Touch Panels support "enhanced" or "accelerated" Dynamo images. In TPDesign4. simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image.Working With The Resource Manager When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be accelerated. FIG. 46 Create Dynamic Image dialog . Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). as opposed to Dynamic (static) or Dynamo (non-accelerated) images. Dynamo Resource images are essentially the same as standard Dynamo images with one key difference: the playback of Dynamo Resource images is accelerated to up to 30 frames-per-second.11 or higher). 2. File: Enter the File name for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image such as is shown in the example above Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. 60 TPDesign4 (v2.Dynamo Resource option Creating a DynaMo Image 1. User: Enter User name if required (this field is optional). Password: Enter Password if required (this field is also optional). Path: Enter the Path for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation (see the Network Path Information section on page 63). The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. Host: Enter the IP Address of the camera/video server. In the Dynamic Images tab. 46). click on New to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Select Panel > Resource Manager to open the Resource Manager dialog.11 or higher) . See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. DynaMo™ Dynamic Images TPDesign4 (v2. these are referred to as Dynamo Resource images. 3. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. or FTP.

5. While TPDesign4 will allow you to place more than one Dynamo Resource image on a page. select the dynamic image that you want to display on this button. select Bitmap to enable the Browse (. as opposed to upon each visit to the page (as is the default). simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog. c. To allow other users to access the files via FTP without password protection. which means that the resource is only downloaded once. via the button's Bitmap properties: a. which resembles the standard Dynamic Image icon but features a lightning bolt (FIG. Refresh only at panel startup: This option is only available if the Refresh Rate is set to zero. Select one that fits your application requirements and interface design.. The default value is 0. Select the DynaMo Dynamic Image that you want to apply to this button. the frame-rate on all Dynamo Resource images may be reduced as a result.FIG. In the Dynamic Images tab.11 or higher) 61 . FIG. Dynamic images that have the Dynamo Resource property set are displayed with a modified icon. Some cameras/servers support more than one output resolution. only one of them should be set as a Dynamo Resource image. TPDesign4 (v2. with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be treated as an (accelerated) Dynamo Resource image.Working With The Resource Manager Refresh Rate: Refreshing resources will cause the button displaying that resource to refresh as well. In the States tab of the Properties window. When working with Dynamo Resource images. 4.) button b. it is important to note the following: If there are multiple Dynamic images displayed on a single page. The user must type either "Anonymous" or "Guest" to access the specified FTP site. and causes the dynamic image to refresh only upon restart of the panel. 47 Create Dynamic Image dialog . Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. 48). Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for accelerated DynaMo Dynamic images only .Dynamo Resource option The User (name) and Password fields are typically used with FTP servers. 47). The Dynamo Resource option is only displayed if the currently selected panel-type supports Accelerated Dynamo images (see AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images). Click Browse to access the Select Resource dialog. leave the User and Password fields blank. Create a General button on which the DynaMo Dynamic Image will be displayed.. that matches the output resolution of the camera/video server providing the dynamic image.

Working With The Resource Manager FIG. and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button. with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of 2x. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images).The Dynamo Resource image is doubled in size.The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all. The Scale Bitmap To Fit options presented here depend on the panel type selected: No . 2x . The Scale to Fit option for Dynamo Resource images differs from panels that do not support Dynamo Resource images in that the aspect ratio of the image is maintained. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container. Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from a panel-type that supports Dynamo Resource images. Click here for a listing of all AMX touch panels that support Dynamo Resource Images. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts.This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Resource image to fit the container button.11 or higher) . the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Any paste operation that causes a Dynamo Resource image to be imported into a target panel project that does not support Dynamo Resource images will cause the Scale Bitmap to Fit setting to be reset on the imported resource. If the resulting image is larger than it's container. 62 TPDesign4 (v2. popup or page. into an FPGA panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. 48 Dynamic Resource Image & Dynamic Image icons (Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog) Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images Dynamo Resource Images have specific scaling/cropping options available via the Scale Bitmap to Fit (State) property for any state that has a Dynamo Resource image assigned to the "Bitmap" property. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. popup or page. Scale To Fit . into a panel-type that doesn't support Dynamo Resource images results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. This is the default setting. Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from an OMAP panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of Scale to Fit.

mozilla. at times it can be difficult to get the needed information with respect to the protocol/syntax of a particular camera/server. what is being sent to the camera/server in the path is a CGI call that may have additional parameters based on the feature set of the camera/server and the syntax the manufacturer requires. This can also help you fully utilize optional features available on that specific device. For Dynamo. at points we have to work through the different ways manufacturers implement standards. Using the browser you can go to your network device's IP address. many networked cameras/servers are accessed using a regular HTML browser. left click on the streaming image and select Copy Image Location. An example of such browser is Mozilla FireFox. and the camera/ server is serving up an HTML page with a video window being a part of the page. One way to work around this is connecting to your networked camera or video server using an Internet browser that captures the location or path to the stream. In general.org. Depending on the camera/network video server type you are using. or if necessary. You can download a free version of FireFox at www. However. For example. you may need to consult product documentation. however.Working With The Resource Manager Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output A number of leading manufacturers are offering a variety of equipment that provides Motion JPEG streaming output. the panel needs to access only the M-JPEG stream. however. manufacturers are using somewhat different syntax for requesting Motion JPEG streams from their networked cameras and servers. Like with any other type of equipment AMX controls. contact manufacturer's technical support. Below is a sample list of popular manufacturers and models: Motion JPEG Cameras and Servers Manufacturer Axis Network camera 205 Network Camera 2100 Network Camera 2120 Network Camera 2420 Network Camera Panasonic KX-HCM280 Color Pan Tilt Zoom KX-HCM10 Indoor Pan Tilt KX-HCM250 Wireless Pan Tilt KX-HCM230 Outdoor Pan Tilt Sony Trendnet Vivotek SCN-RZ30N Pan/Tilt/25x Zoom TV-IP301 IP2111 Network Camera IP2112 Network Camera VS2402 Video Server Network video server 241Q Video Server 4 Inputs 241S Video Server 1 Input Network Path Information While AMX strives to bring to the market innovative features such as support for Motion JPEG.11 or higher) 63 . TPDesign4 (v2. In the case of streaming network cameras/servers. not the entire HTML page served by the camera/server by default. manufacturer's documentation and customer support are the most reliable ways of obtaining information on the device's communication protocol/syntax. What follows are examples for some of most popular manufacturers.

Each camera can also have a camera ID number but that is optional.cgi?camera=&resolution=320x240 Dynamic Image Settings . 49 Dynamic Image Settings . FIG.Example 1: Axis Axis equipment supports a number of resolutions.Example 2: Panasonic Manufacturer: Panasonic Model: BL-C10A (camera) Path: nphMotionJpeg?resolution=320x240&Quality=Standard 64 TPDesign4 (v2. just as a number of other features that can be indicated in the path (FIG. and therefore requires that the target resolution be indicated.Example 2: Panasonic FIG. 49).11 or higher) .Example 1: Axis Manufacturer: Axis Model: 2100 (camera) Path: axis-cgi/mjpg/video. 50 Dynamic Image Settings .Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings .

51 Dynamic Image Settings . In TPD4. 2.Example 3: Vivotek Manufacturer: Vivotek Model: 2111 (camera) Path: cgi-bin/video. To provide the other information required in this dialog.Example 3: Vivotek FIG. 2.30) Path: goform File: video2 user & password are blank Refresh Rate: 1 (or more) DynaMo Dynamic Image Example . 4.1. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. The default settings of "640x480" and "Highest Quality" should be OK. Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. b. 3. Configure the camera for JPEG and 15fps. set the dynamic image properties to: Protocol: HTTP (default) Host: (the default IP of this camera is 192.jpg?cam=1&quality=3&size=2 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras To get a streaming image from the TV-IP301 Trendnet IP camera on to a dynamic image window of a touch panel: 1. 52): TPDesign4 (v2. we'll use "Beach 1").Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings .Adding a Streaming Webcam Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image in the form of an online streaming webcam to the Resource Manager: 1. go to the web cam that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. refer to the source image properties: a.11 or higher) 65 . Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. In a web browser.168.

axiscam. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this webcam: http://coralsandsinn. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: coralsandsinn.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case.jpg 5. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.11 or higher) . the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. c.axiscam.axiscam.cgi? File = camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information.element properties As indicated above. it is not required as part of the Host. 66 TPDesign4 (v2. 52 Online webcam .net Path = axis-cgi/jpg/image. e.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: a. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog: Host = coralsandsinn. At this point. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. but also protocol and path information as well.jpg d. b.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank.

Click OK to add this webcam as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager.11 or higher) 67 . the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. FIG. 53 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog f. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. Click Dynamo Resource to use this Dynamic Image as an (accelerated) DynaMo Dynamic Image. The Refresh Only at Panel Startup option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero. When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With The Resource Manager The Refresh Rate should be left to zero.

11 or higher) . Resource Manager dialog . 68 TPDesign4 (v2.Slots tab The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to preview and manage all image and sound files that are being used in your project (FIG. 54 Resource Manager dialog . it is available for selection as an icon through the Properties Control Window (States tab). it is considered to be an Icon. popup pages and/or buttons as Icons. FIG. The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog lists all Icon Slot assignments currently defined in the Project. it can be used as an Icon in your Project. 54). the Slot tab lists only those image and sound files that are currently assigned to a slot. it can be assigned to a Slot position. All image and sound files must be assigned to a slot before they can applied to pages. Each project has 2000 slots available. Once the image file is assigned to a Slot. Once an image or sound file has been assigned a slot. TPD4 supports up to 500 icon slot assignments. Once an image file is imported into the Project (via the Resource Manager). Once a Image or Sound has been assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager.Slots tab Where the Images and Sounds tabs contain "libraries" of all Image and Sound files (even if they have not been assigned to a slot). Popup Pages or Buttons in the Project.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Slots TPD4 utilizes the concept of Slots for adding Icons to Pages.

the program limits you to 2000 slots per panel. If there are no images or sounds already assigned to slots (the Slots tab is empty). select ten slots before assigning the files.11 or higher) 69 . Note that the Overwrite and Insert options affect how the Move option works. Swap: Use this option to swap two file / slot assignments. In this case. there is no need to assign it to a slot (see Bitmaps vs. and click Swap. Assign: This command assigns the selected Image or Sound file(s) to slot(s). Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Dynamic Images or Sounds tab. Cancel: If have selected one or more images. in the order in which they were selected. if you selected ten files to assign to slots. Click Assign To Slot. First select the file that you want to duplicate. Use the Overwrite and Insert radio buttons to select a preference for assigning files to slot(s) with previous file assignments. The selected file is moved to the selected slot. you must select the same number of slots as the number of images copied. click Assign (in the Slots tab) to assign the file to slot 1. you can click Cancel to cancel the process before you set the slot assignment. If there are already some slot assignments present (in the Slots tab). click to select the slot to which you want to apply the image file and click Assign (in the Slots tab). click the slot where you want to begin pasting the set of images. Icons). dynamic images or sound files to slot positions for use in the Project: 1. then select the slot that you want to target for the duplicated file. Select Overwrite to automatically overwrite any pre-existing file assignments in the affected slots. and click Duplicate. The files will be pasted consecutively. they will be assigned in the order in which they were selected. depending on the type of file you are adding. If you selected multiple files. Duplicate: Use this option to duplicate a selected file to another slot. TPDesign4 (v2. Select Insert to insert the files without overwriting anything. then click on the target slot for the selected file and click Move. Select one or more files (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. By default. 54 on page 68). you can use up to 9900 slots per panel if necessary by changing the maximum number of slots per panel. you'll have to more careful about how you choose to assign the files. and clicked Assign to Slot (in the Images tab). only the first five files will be assigned. However. Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions To assign image files. This open the Slots tab (FIG. If you select five slots. The toolbar button in this tab contains several command options: Select All: Click to select all slots (1-2000). 3. Move: Use this option to move a slot assignment. The selected file is duplicated in the targeted slot. If you are assigning a single file to a slot with a pre-existing file assignment. If you are assigning multiple files to multiple slots. The two file / slot assignments are swapped. 4.Working With The Resource Manager If you don't intend to use a image or sound file as an Icon. or Shift + click to select a range of files). First select a file / slot assignment. When pasting multiple image files to the Slots tab. Ctrl + click to select two files. the other slot assignments are shifted to accommodate the new assignments. For example. 2. only the first file selected will be assigned. Open the Images. If you select just one slot.

BMP files). Use icons as button graphics that can be placed "on top" of a color fill. the image is still available as a Bitmap (and remains in any other slot it is assigned to). For example. JPGs.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Icons Icons are bitmap images that have imported into the project. Any supported image file can be made to be an icon. on top of the icon. including all slots to which it was assigned. Bitmaps that have been imported into the Project are listed in the Images tab of the Resource Manager. a Bitmap can be any supported image type (not limited to . 70 TPDesign4 (v2. bitmap or video fill background. Icons: The term Icon refers to any image file that has been imported into the Project and assigned to a Slot position in the Resource Manager. Icons can also be put into motion via the Slot Position tweener (accessible via the Tweeners sub-menu). Having an image assigned to a slot allows you to reference the same image as either a Bitmap or an Icon. In TPD4. In TPD4. icons exist before bitmaps in the Z-Order. Icons are different than Bitmaps in several ways: All imported images are considered to be Bitmaps. you could create a button with a Bitmap image. Icons occupy slots in the Resource Manager. Icons allow for complex graphics and animations. when a Bitmap (in the Images tab of the Resource Manager) is deleted. When an image's slot position assignment is deleted from the Project. Icons are drawn after Bitmaps. Think of bitmaps as the background button graphic. PNGs. however. The important thing to understand about Bitmaps in the context of TPD4 buttons is that they are drawn first. and they are always placed in a layer beneath any Icons. See Z-Order for details. simply by assigning it to a slot position. You can think of Bitmaps as the background image used on Pages. and icons as the foreground graphic image. Icon Slot Assignments that have been specified in the Project are listed in the Slots tab of the Resource Manager.11 or higher) . you could place a static icon over an animated bitmap or color transition effect. There are important differences in the way each type is treated: Bitmaps: The term Bitmap is a generic term that describes any pixel-based image file. Bitmaps cannot. Icons TPD4 uses two concepts of image files: Bitmaps and Icons. PSDs and BMPs (among others) are supported Bitmap file types. so they are always drawn on top of a bitmap image. For example. but an image cannot also be referenced as an Icon until it is assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. Bitmaps vs. Popup Pages and Buttons. Text is always drawn last. which may also use Icons (as well as text) in addition to the background image (see Z-Order for details). For example. and are always appear on top of the Bitmap layer. and place an Icon on top of the Bitmap. and assigned slot numbers (via the Resource Manager dialog). that image is removed from the entire project.

55): FIG. button state. buttons and icons). The Slots tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all sound files. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. before they are applied in the project.e.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Sounds Resource Manager dialog . Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected sound file(s) to slot(s).11 or higher) 71 . regardless of their context (i.WAV and . so that you can maintain an organized profile of all sound files in the project. etc). Use this tab as a "library" of every sound file that will be used in your project (for pages. TPDesign4 (v2.MP3 files. It is important to import all of your sound files to this tab first. 55 Resource Manager dialog .Sounds tab The Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files to be used in your project (FIG. popup pages.Sounds tab TPD4 supports . page flip. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the sound files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order.

4. 2. There are many freeware programs available to encode WAV files into MP3's. Click Open to import the files to the Sounds tab. 56 Choose Directory dialog 5. 2. 3. 6. 3. you should experience very little (if any) difference in sound quality. 72 TPDesign4 (v2. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing sound files that have the same file name as the file selected for import. anytime a sound file with a duplicate file name is imported. it will replace the original file on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. Select one or more files to export (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. Dynamic Images. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. or Shift + click to select a range of files). This invokes the Open dialog. Locate and select the file(s) to import. Click the Import button. The program prompts you when the export is finished. FIG. 55 on page 71): 1.11 or higher) . 6. 4. If MP3 files are encoded correctly. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Open the Sounds tab. If you import an sound file that has already been imported to the Sounds tab. 5. The primary difference between the two is that MP3 represents a compressed version of a WAV file. Slots or Sounds). Click the Export button. If this option is selected. Importing Sound Files To Your Project To import sound files to the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog (FIG.Working With The Resource Manager Supported Sound File Types TPD4 supports WAV and MP3 sound formats.". Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory To export image (including dynamic images) and sound files from Resource Manager dialog to a specified directory: 1.. Use the Browse button to locate a target directory for the files. This opens the Choose Directory dialog (FIG. Click OK. Open the appropriate tab for the type of file you want to export (Images. This is true even if the second version of the sound file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension.. the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of. 56).

Editing Image Files 1. Open the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog. 3. Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to add external image and sound editing programs. undo/redo.. and control is returned to TPD4. Once you have indicated a program to be used as the default editor. the image or sound file is opened in the default editing program. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for sound files. Open the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog. Any subsequent changes made in the external editor will not be reflected nor applied. 2.) will cause the link between TPD4 and the external application to be broken. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for image files. Any saved changes to the resource made in the external editor will be immediately reflected in TPD4. and another for Sound files. and specify the default editors. See the Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files section on page 272. You must first associate one or more external editing programs with Image files. See the Program Preferences section on page 265 for details. Any action taken in TPD4 that would change the state of the image or sound file being edited (e. Select the sound file that you want to edit. When the edit session begins. Select the image file that you want to edit. 2. the Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files section on page 272 and the Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program section on page 273 for more information. delete.g. rename. 3.Working With The Resource Manager Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs TPD4 supports the use of external programs for editing image and/or sound files used in your project.11 or higher) 73 . TPDesign4 (v2. etc. you can access it via the Edit button in the Images and Sounds tabs of the Resource Manager dialog. Editing Sound Files 1.

11 or higher) .Working With The Resource Manager 74 TPDesign4 (v2.

the text color for text applied directly to the page. but can also have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination.see the Creating a Page Flip section on page 108. In FIG. Double-click on any page contained in any open project to set it as the active project. the page background color.Working With Pages Working With Pages Overview Pages are not only containers for buttons. You can select the name for the page. Pages cannot have borders and possess only one state. 58). FIG. 58 Add Page dialog TPDesign4 (v2. Each page must be uniquely named within its respective panel file in order to be accepted by the program. Creating a New Page 1. Select Panel > Add Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Page dialog (FIG. all name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. "TPI-PRO-DVI test" is the active project. You may place text directly on a page outside the context of a button. 57. and "Page 1" is the active page in the project: FIG. The active project/page is indicated in the Workspace Window by a green wedge to the left of the panel and page icons. If you change any of these properties (except the name) your changes will be saved and future page creations will carry those selections forward.11 or higher) 75 . The maximum number of pages in a panel file = 500. 57 Workspace Window (indicating the active Project & Page) Page Flips (which provide the ability to "flip" from one page to another via a button press) are a button-oriented function . and a font for any text specified (including the font size and settings).

To set Page-level properties. In most cases. Click OK to add the new page to the active project. Click the browse button (... Set the Font Name and Size. Set the Page Background color: a. Depending on the item selected. The following general properties are supported at the page level: Name Description Setting Programming Properties: Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page programming properties. Single-click to select a new color from the list. The following programming properties are supported at the page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page state properties. click on the Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). The General tab contains a table that lists the page properties for the active page. The new page will be appear in the Workspace Navigator in the Pages folder. The State tab contains a table that lists the page state properties for the active page. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field..) next to Page Background to open the Colors dialog. or both. you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. select from a drop-down menu. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. 3. 5. select from a drop-down menu. The Programming tab contains a table that lists the programming properties for the active page. Enter a descriptive name for the new page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters). click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. under the project to which the page was added (as the active page). Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. Set the Page Text color (for text applied directly to the page): a. the Properties Window displays the properties available for the Page. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. To edit any of the listed properties. To edit any of the listed properties. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the window beneath these fields. Depending on the item selected. Setting Page Properties Panel Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Window. b. Setting General Properties: Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Window to set/edit page properties. b.11 or higher) .) next to Text to open the Colors dialog. With the Page selected.Working With Pages 2. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. separated into three tabs (General. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Click the browse button (. Single-click to select a new color from the list. or both. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. or both.. To edit any of the listed properties. you can either set the item manually. 6. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Programming and States). 76 TPDesign4 (v2. 4.

simply click on a Page entry in the Workspace Window and type directly into the text field (FIG.Working With Pages The following state properties are supported at the page level: Draw Order Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Video Fill Video Touch Pass-Thru Bitmap Bitmap Justification Icon Slot Icon Justification Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Sound Renaming a Page To rename any Page in the active project. 60 States tab of the Properties Control window . click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (. Select the page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . and select the color that you want to apply to the page.. 2. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. In the States tab of the Properties Window. 59 Renaming a Page (via the Workspace Window) Adding a Fill Color to a Page 1.. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog.11 or higher) 77 . 60). FIG. 59). 4.) button (FIG. FIG.Fill Color field 3.Pages tab). TPDesign4 (v2.

check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the page (FIG. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page.) button (FIG. Select the page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Page.. 4. 62). 5. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog.. 62 States tab of the Properties Control window . Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. 1. 61 States tab of the Properties Control window . Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there.Bitmap field 3. FIG. To check the size of the Pages in your project.Working With Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Page in your project. 78 TPDesign4 (v2. 61).Pages tab). 2. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. FIG. where you can select the desired bitmap.11 or higher) . In the States tab of the Properties Window. to serve as the background image. open the image in any graphics editor program. To scale an image to fit a target Page.

unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). you can type directly into the Text field.Icon Slot field 3.. FIG.Pages tab). Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state). If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Page. Alternatively.. 4. 65 States tab of the Properties Control window . 1. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position.Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog. Adding Text to a Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. TPDesign4 (v2. 1. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. you can display text directly on a Page in your project. click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. 64 States tab of the Properties Control window .Pages tab). where you can select the desired icon. 63). 64). 63 States tab of the Properties Control window . In the States tab of the Properties Control window. 65). FIG. and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. FIG. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap. You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. Select the page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace . Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the page (FIG.Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image..) button (FIG. click on the Text field to enable the browse (.Working With Pages Adding an Icon to a Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Page in your project. 5. If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog.) button (FIG.. 2.11 or higher) 79 . Select the page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace . 2.

68 States tab of the Properties Control window . any text that won't fit on the selected Page may not be visible. 80 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Pages Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. 67). Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the page (FIG. 66 States tab of the Properties Control window . 4. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.) button (FIG. FIG.Word Wrap field If you select No. FIG.Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Page text. 67 States tab of the Properties Control window . depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Page..Font field Select the desired font (in the Font dialog).11 or higher) . and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Page (Yes or No . 68). 6.Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text. FIG. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. 69 States tab of the Properties Control window . FIG. 69). 5. if any exists.) button (FIG. 3.FIG.... 66). Click Word Wrap.

and a Popup Pages folder (containing Popup pages). or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar). Select (or a create) a Page in your project. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.States Tab. Popup Page or Button. Deleting Pages From a Project To delete a page from the active project. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. You can copy a page either by selecting a Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. 70 States tab of the Properties Control window . To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. at the top most level are Panel Names. deleting the last remaining page is not allowed.Video Fill field 3. The program will prompt you to verify the page deletion first. select the page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). therefore. Copying/Pasting Pages Copying Pages In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). 70): FIG. Immediately below the panel names is a Pages folder (containing Pages). All panels must include at least one page. Pasting Pages You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied page onto: (1) an active Design View window (2) the panel name in the Workspace Navigator (3) the folder named Pages Pasting a page onto the Popup Pages folder (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed. 2. In the Properties Control window .Working With Pages Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page.11 or higher) 81 . TPDesign4 (v2. and select Edit > Delete.

Select Export current display state for buttons to capture the Pages as they are currently displayed in the Design View. If this option is not selected. use $P to insert the Panel name and $p to insert the Page name into the exported file's name. By default. If this option is not selected. Specify a template for the resulting filenames in the Filename Template field. Use the Scale% up and down arrows indicate a percentage to down-scale the exported images. 71 Export Page Images dialog 2. only the Page underneath any currently displayed function codes will be exported. By default. 71). Select Export popup pages shown on pages to include any Popup Pages that are being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. Select Export information overlay to include any function code information this is currently being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. you can select the desired level of image compression 7. only the Page underneath any currently viewed Popup Pages will be exported. Select Panel > Export Page Images to open the Export Page Images dialog (FIG. FIG. The default setting is 100% (no scaling). 8.11 or higher) . PNG or BMP) for the resulting image files from the File Format dropdown. If this option is not selected. 9. 4. Use the checkboxes in the Pages and Popups lists to select which Pages and Popup Pages to export. By default.. it will export the buttons in the (default) Off state. Use the browse button (. 6. Select a image file type (JPG.. 82 TPDesign4 (v2. 3. As described on the dialog.Working With Pages Exporting Pages as Image Files Use the options in the Export Page Images dialog to export one or Pages in the current Project as image files: 1. the template is set to include the Panel file name and the Page name into the generated image's file name. this option is disabled. this option is enabled. 5. If JPG is selected. this option is enabled.) to navigate to a target directory via the Browse For Folder dialog. with the button's current display state. The file extension is automatically. Specify a target directory for the exported image files in the Export Directory field. By default. based on the File Format selection.

Working With Pages Printing Pages Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. FIG. 72 Print Preview window Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page.11 or higher) 83 . This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. TPDesign4 (v2. 72). Zoom In: Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out: Zooms out from the page view Close: Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC. as they will appear when printed. in the Print Preview window (FIG. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print: Prints the current page view Next Page: Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page: Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page: Toggles the page view to one or two pages.

Working With Pages 84 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

top. they may have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination.11 or higher) 85 . Popup pages. and contain only one state. 4. Beyond these properties popup pages have many typically button specific properties. Click the down-arrow to open the Border Style drop-down menu. FIG. can be assigned a border style and border color. width or height values. unlike pages. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Popup Pages Working With Popup Pages Overview Popup pages are similar to pages in some respects as they are a container for buttons. enter Left and Top coordinates (in pixels. 73 Add Popup Page dialog 2. which allows you to quickly create new popup pages. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. Select Panel > Add Popup Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Popup Page dialog (FIG. in a way that is similar to drawing new buttons. To position the Popup manually. In the Position fields. as well as left. You can also set it's position manually by dragging it wherever you want it to appear. relative to the upper-left corner of the page which is 0. and click to select the desired border style for the popup page. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. 1.0) for the desired placement of the popup page when it displayed on the panel. as well as some special properties that apply only to popup pages. Creating a Popup Page TPD4 features the Popup Draw tool. Refer to the Using the Popup Draw Tool section on page 87 for details. You must first select a Popup Page (in the Workspace window) in order to enable the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. you can click and drag to position it manually. Enter a descriptive name for the new popup page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters . Use the Position fields when you need to achieve exact positioning.see the Inappropriate File Name Characters section on page 29). 73). 3.

Click the browse button (. To resize the Popup manually. Set the Border color: a.. Single-click to select a new color from the list. This option opens the Select Popup Pages to Show dialog. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. you can click and drag the red handles on the Popup to resize it manually. the Popup will always appear in the position specified. 8. Single-click to select a new color from the list.Working With Popup Pages Note that once you specify the position of the Popup on the page. Click the browse button (. regardless of the page that you display on.) next to Border Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. FIG. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the right side of the dialog. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu.) next to Text Color to open the Colors dialog. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option). b. 74). Note that once you resize the Popup on the page. Single-click to select a new color from the list.. Set the Text color (for text applied directly to the popup page): a.. 7.11 or higher) . enter the desired Width and Height dimensions (in pixels) for the popup window. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. where you can select the Popup Page that you want to display on the page. Set the Page Background color: a. 86 TPDesign4 (v2. the Popup will retain the dimensions specified... Popup Pages may be created in any size beyond the minimum and up to the maximum size of the panel. 6. In the Size fields. 5. regardless of the page that you display on.) next to Fill Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog (FIG. 74 Colors dialog b. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option). b. You can also set the dimensions manually by dragging the sizing handles on the Popup. Click the browse button (.

Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the Sample window. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. FIG. 75 Choose Font dialog b. and the result is the same as through standard means: 1.. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). Use the Group drop-down list to assign the newly created popup page to an existing group. The minimum popup page size is 15 pixels in height or width. under the project to which the page was added. 76 Popup Draw Tool The technique is similar to drawing a button. Left-click inside the desired page (in the active Design View window). click and hold the Button Draw tool (in the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) for one second to open the drop-down menu containing the Popup Draw tool. The new Popup Page will be displayed in the Workspace Navigator Pages folder. Click the browse button (. 10. Set the Font Name and Size. a. Click OK to add the new Popup Page to the active project..) next to Font to open the Choose Font dialog (FIG. drag to draw the popup page to the desired size and shape. 2. In most cases. if desired. When using the Selection tool.Working With Popup Pages 9. 76) allows you to draw Popup Pages directly onto a page. Select Edit > Popup Draw Tool (or click the toolbar button) to activate the Popup Draw tool. To access the Popup Draw toolbar button. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. TPDesign4 (v2. Using the Popup Draw Tool The Popup Draw Tool (FIG. and while holding the left mouse button down. FIG. 75). 11. When using the Button Draw or Popup Draw tools. hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the item to a square.11 or higher) 87 .

any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. 6. The following general properties are supported at the popup page level: Name Left Top Width Height Reset Pos. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. To edit any of the listed button properties. Setting General Properties: Popup Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. The States tab of the Properties Control window displays state-related information for the new popup in a editable table. Setting Popup Page Properties Popup Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Control Window.Working With Popup Pages When using the Selection tool. the Properties Control window displays the properties available for the Popup Page. On Show Group Timeout Modal Show Effect Show Effect X/Y Pos Show Effect Time Hide Effect Hide Effect X/Y Pos 88 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . The Programming tab of the Properties Control window displays programming-related properties for the popup page in a editable table. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. To set Popup Page-level properties. click on the Popup Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). Use this table to set the popup page's general properties. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. Select File > Save to save your changes. Edit the (Off) state properties as desired. Use this table to set the popup page's programming properties. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. The General tab of the Properties Control window displays general (non-states related) properties for the popup page in a editable table. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. you can either set the item manually. or both. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). The General tab contains a table that lists the properties for the active popup page. This is a visual indication that the newly created popup has the Edit Focus. 4. separated into three tabs (General. you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the popup that are small yellow squares with red interiors. With an item selected in a Design View window. With the Popup Page selected. Upon the creation of a popup page. as opposed to clicking on the item. 5. 7. In most cases. select from a drop-down menu. Programming and States). Depending on the item selected. 3.

or both. The Programming tab contains a table that lists program-related properties (Address and Channel Port/Channel Code assignments) for the active popup page.11 or higher) 89 . or both. The State tab contains a table that lists the state properties for the active popup page. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. select from a drop-down menu. The following state properties are supported at the popup page level: Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Video Fill Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Popup Pages Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. select from a drop-down menu. To edit any of the listed button properties. Depending on the item selected. Depending on the item selected. you can either set the item manually. The following programming properties are supported at the popup page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Popup Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page state properties. To edit any of the listed button properties. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.

Pages tab). 90 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. simply click on a Popup Page entry in the Workspace and type directly into the text field (FIG. 78). FIG. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . Click OK to close the Colors dialog. 4. 79). and select the color that you want to apply to the Popup Page. 79 States tab of the Properties Control window . you can utilize several of the Drawing Assist tools available via the Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars and the Layout menu to edit the size and position of the popup page (FIG. 77). Position Assist Tools toolbar Size Assist Tools toolbar FIG.. 77 Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars With only the popup page selected.Fill Color field 3. click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. 78 Renaming a Popup Page Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page 1.11 or higher) .) button (FIG. With the selection of one or more buttons on the page in conjunction with a popup page selection. the Size to Image tool (if an image has been placed on the popup page). as well as apply any of the options from the Aspect Ratio tool. Renaming a Popup Page To rename any Popup Page in the active project.Working With Popup Pages Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages Once a popup page is displayed on a main Page in the Design View. you can use the Center Horizontal and Center Vertical.. all of the existing Drawing Assist tools are available to allow you to size and align their popup page(s) with existing buttons on the page. all five border tools (if a border has been applied to the popup page). 2.

In the States tab of the Properties Control window. where you can select the desired bitmap. where you can select the desired icon. 6. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. 81 States tab of the Properties Control window . Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace .) button. If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Popup Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Popup Page in your project. Adding an Icon to a Popup Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Popup Page in your project. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. To scale an image to fit a target Page/panel. FIG. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (. 2.Pages tab). open the image in any graphics editor program. FIG. to serve as the background image. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Popup Page.. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the Popup Page.Bitmap field 3. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image.) button. 1.. 1. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page/panel.. 80 States tab of the Properties Control window . Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace .11 or higher) 91 . 2. 4. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). 82 States tab of the Properties Control window . 5. To check the size of the Popup Pages in your project. FIG. Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog.Pages tab).Icon Slot field 3..

. 1.Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Popup Page text. Adding Text to a Popup Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. Alternatively.) button (FIG. 5. you can display text directly on a Popup Page in your project. FIG. 85). FIG.11 or higher) . 4.. 84 States tab of the Properties Control window . and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). 83 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.) button (FIG. 85 States tab of the Properties Control window . Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state). If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Popup Page. click on the Text field to enable the browse (. 86). 86 States tab of the Properties Control window .Font field 92 TPDesign4 (v2. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace .Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog.. the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap. FIG. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. you can type directly into the Text field..Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. 84). FIG. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the Popup Page. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.Working With Popup Pages 4.. 2.. if any exists.) button (FIG. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.Pages tab). 3. Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text.

Creating Popup Page Groups Popup Page Groups provide a mechanism to group popup pages into mutually exclusive groups for display purposes. Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the Popup Page (FIG. In the Properties Control window (General tab). 90 States tab of the Properties Control window . FIG.Word Wrap field If you select No.Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text.Group field TPDesign4 (v2. 5. click Group to activate the text field (FIG. 2.11 or higher) 93 . To create a Popup Page group: 1.FIG. Popup Page or Button. 87). 89): FIG. Click Word Wrap. 88). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. FIG. 90). FIG. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. In the Properties Control window . 2. any text that won't fit on the selected Popup Page may not be visible. 87 States tab of the Properties Control window . depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Popup Page. 6. 88 States tab of the Properties Control window . 89 States tab of the Properties Control window .States Tab.Video Fill field 3. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG.Working With Popup Pages Select the desired font (in the Font dialog). and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Popup Page (Yes or No . Select a popup page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page.

. The named Popup Group folder is created under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator Pages tab (FIG. select the popup page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab).Group field To remove a popup page from a group. 91). or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar). Pasting Popup Pages You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied popup page onto: (1) an active Design View (2) the panel name in the Panel Navigator (3) the folder named Popup Pages Pasting a popup page onto another page or popup page in the Panel Navigator (which is only a paste target for buttons) or onto the folder named Pages (which is for pages only) is not allowed. Copying/Pasting Popup Pages Copying Popup Pages You can copy a popup page either by selecting a Popup Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. drag the desired popup page(s) into the desired group folder or set the group association via the Group field in the Properties Control window (FIG. Deleting Popup Pages From a Project To delete a popup page from the active project. 91 Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator 5. FIG. 92). and drag it out of the group. The program will prompt you to verify the popup page deletion first. 92 States tab of the Properties Control window . FIG. 4. or set the Group field to None in the Properties Control window.11 or higher) . To place a popup page in a particular popup group: In the Workspace Window. and select Edit > Delete. Enter a name for the popup group folder. select the popup page in the Workspace Navigator.Working With Popup Pages 3. 94 TPDesign4 (v2.

To hide all Popup Pages: Select Hide All Popup Pages in the Page menu. 93 Main Toolbar . Additionally. or click the Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button. and select Show Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). TPDesign4 (v2. To hide a selected Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). the Workspace Navigator context menu or the toolbar buttons contained in the Main toolbar (FIG.Working With Popup Pages Show/Hide Popup Pages The Show Popup Page and Hide Popup Page options can be selected via the Page menu.Show Popup Page. Design View context menu. and select Hide Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). The Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button is available on the Main toolbar only. To show a Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). 93). you can drag and drop a Popup Page from the Workspace Window onto a Design View window to show the selected Popup Page.11 or higher) 95 . Hide Popup Page & Hide All Popup Pages buttons This option deals only with showing a popup page (selected in the workspace) on a page that is currently open in the design view. FIG.

Working With Popup Pages 96 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

Select to draw buttons (all types.Select to draw Popup Pages.Select to draw List Box Buttons. Computer Control: Allow you to connect to a PC running a VNC server for remote control applications. List Box Draw Tool . Multi-State Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. Popup Draw Tool . Joystick: Vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). except List Box buttons). and select from the list (see List Box Buttons). TakeNote: Allow you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. Multi-state bargraph buttons also allow you to create custom bargraph sliders. Joystick buttons only use the Off state. TPDesign4 (v2. Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). Multi-State General: Basic multi-state buttons that can also be used for most touch panel functions. there is no On state associated with them. and support up to 256 states.11 or higher) 97 . Text Input: Intended only to display (non-interactive) text on the panel. 94): Button Draw Tool Popup Draw Tool List Box Draw Tool FIG.Working With Buttons Working With Buttons Overview TPDesign4 supports the following button types: General: Basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. Button Draw Tools Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tools drop-down (FIG. List Box: Utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list. not associated with any specific functionality. List box buttons can be used to allow end-users to view data in list form. Multi-state buttons are used to create animation effects. 94 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to select from the other types of Draw Tools: Button Draw Tool . Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. and support up to 256 states.

and place your cursor within the boundaries of an open Design View. Experiment with different border types to get the results you're after. To toggle between Off and On states. Use the fields and options in the General. With an item selected in a Design View window. 2. 95 Button Draw Tool (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) Alternatively.e. Upon the creation of a button on a page (or popup page) you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the button that are small yellow squares with red interiors. If you see this. You will see a sizing rectangle as you drag the mouse. 3. 96 Drawing a New Button Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the button to a square. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). 98 TPDesign4 (v2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally. release the left mouse button (FIG. Refer to Properties Window for details. 1. single-click the State button. Open the Page (or Popup page) that the button will be added to. 4. select Edit > Button Draw Tool from the main menu. The Button Selection/Draw toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. 97).11 or higher) .Working With Buttons Drawing a Button Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tool. 96). FIG. Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to access a drop-down of the other types of Draw Tools (FIG. try using "Circle 50" rather than "Circle 100"). 5. indicating the size of the button you are drawing (FIG. indicating edit focus. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. Programming and States tabs of the Properties Window to specify general. programming. FIG. 6. To complete the button draw action. This is a result of scaling the button smaller than what the selected border requires to accommodate the slider bar. 97 New Button The maximum number of buttons per page / popup page = 500. you may notice the slider bar appearing partially outside of the button border. try using a "smaller" border (i. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. oval or diamond border types. 95): Button Draw Tool FIG. and state-specific properties for the selected button. Select the Button Draw Tool (used for all button types other than List Box Buttons). When using the circle. Minimum button size is 4 x 4 pixels.

note that the button is automatically renamed to "Welcome". based on the text and/or bitmap applied to the button: If you apply text to the button. However. the Lock Button Name option is set to Off. then add the text "Welcome". the button name is automatically updated with either the latest text or bitmap assignment. if there is text associated with a button and you add an icon. Select File > Save to save your changes. the button name will not change. However. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project). Select View > Button Preview to preview the button (click Push to simulate a button press) in the Button Preview window (FIG. when you apply a bitmap to the button. any time you change the bitmap or the text on the button. via the Name field. Note that if you change the text. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the bitmap file name (i. 8. click Lock Button Name and select Yes to prevent the button from being automatically renamed by the program when you edit the text or bitmap assignment(s). and you add a bitmap. the button text is substituted for the button number. However. TPDesign4 (v2. if the button has no text. At any point in the design process.Button Preview window Generated Button Names When new buttons are created. Note that this name change occurs on the fly. By default. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the icon's name. and does not require a Save operation. the button is again renamed to reflect the updated text. 98 New Button . If there is text associated with a button.11 or higher) 99 . However.Working With Buttons 7. Furthermore. Lock Button Name does not prevent you from manually renaming the button. 98): FIG. TPD4 goes further in automatically generating a descriptive name for the button. if the button has no text. "Background"). For example if you create a new button (which is automatically named "Button 9"). the button name will not change. Additionally. when you apply an icon to the button. This is where the Lock Button Name option (General tab of the Properties Control Window) comes into play. Text on a button always overrides the presence of a bitmap.e.

Specifying a Button Border To specify a border style for a button. 100 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. If no Border Style was specified (none). and select a border style from the Border Name (State) Property (FIG..11 or higher) . then all border names are available in the provided list. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. FIG. select the button in the Design View window. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. Alternatively.Text 3. 101).Working With Buttons Specifying the Button Type To specify the button type for any button: 1. 102).. select Type to access the drop-down menu of Supported Button Types (FIG. Select the button to which you want to add or change text (with the Selection tool). 2. Select or a create a button. and type the button text as desired. In the General tab of the Properties Window. click on the Text field in the state that you want add the text to. This enables the browse (. For List Box buttons. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Border Style. Adding Text to a Button Since button text is a state-specific property. 100 Border Name drop-down menu (State Property) If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab).) button (FIG. 99 Button Type drop-down menu (General Property) 3. 99). then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. Select the desired button type. 2. Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog (FIG. you can type directly into the Text field. you can add or change the button text via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. 101 State Properties . 100): FIG.

Hebrew. You can also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing button text. Foreign Language Support for Text For page and button state text properties. so keep in mind wether you want the text to occur on all states. Once imported into the panel project. TPD4 supports non-complex scripts (those that can be printed correctly without the use of a rendered script) to the extent that the True Type font currently selected for that state supports the language in question. or use the Text field under All States to add the text to every state in the button. 4. The size of the font required to support the language (particularly in the case of East Asian languages that utilize ideograms) might be prohibitive due to limits of available memory on the target device. the panel designer may be forced to use a pre-rendered graphic to display the desired text. if any exists. If the size of the font exceeds the memory available on the device. Click anywhere outside of the Text field to set the button text (or click OK to close the Enter Text dialog). TPDesign4 (v2. These languages include (but are not limited to) Arabic. In order to display such languages on a page or button state. so use the Text field in the state that you want to change. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. or only on specific states. the panel designer must create a pre-rendered graphic of the desired text (using a suitable graphics application) that can then be imported into the TPD4 panel project as a graphic (icon or bitmap). 102 Enter Text dialog You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. and Devangari.11 or higher) 101 . TPD4 (and the G4 firmware itself) do not provide explicit support for languages that utilize complex scripts.Working With Buttons FIG. Button text is state-specific. See the True Type Font Support section on page 6. the graphic can be assigned to one or more page or button states.

104). Select the button that you want to add or change the fill color on (with the Selection tool).. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change.Working With Buttons Adding a Fill Color To a Button Since Fill Color is a state-specific property.. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Select the button to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (with the Selection tool).. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want add the Fill Color to. or use the Fill Color field under All States to add the Fill Color to every state in the button. 3. 103 State Properties . Click OK to close the Colors dialog. 104 Colors dialog 4. or only on specific states.Text Button Fill Colors are state-specific. you can add or change the button fill color via the State tab of the Properties Control window: 1. FIG. or use the Fill Color field under All States to change the fill color on every state in the button. 102 TPDesign4 (v2. This enables the browse button (. and select the color that you want to apply to the Button/State (FIG.. so keep in mind wether you want the Fill Color to occur on all states. 2.) button (FIG.). so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. 2. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window.11 or higher) . Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. you can add or change the button Fill Color assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. 103). FIG. Changing the Button Fill Color Since button fill color is a state-specific property. This enables the browse (. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change the fill color on.

FIG. Adding a Bitmap to a Button Since bitmap assignment is a state-specific property. where you can change the fill color. or only on specific states.) button (FIG.) to open the Colors dialog. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window.Working With Buttons 3. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. click on the Bitmap field in the state that you want add the bitmap to. FIG. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. so use the Bitmap field in the state that you want to change. 3. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54). 4.. 2. 106 Select Resource dialog Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog.Bitmap Button bitmaps are state-specific. TPDesign4 (v2.. you can add or change the button bitmap assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. This enables the browse (. Select the button to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (with the Selection tool). 105).. so keep in mind wether you want the bitmap to occur on all states.. 105 State Properties . or use the Bitmap field under All States to add the bitmap to every state in the button. 106).11 or higher) 103 . Click OK to close the Colors dialog. where you can select the desired bitmap (FIG. Click the browse button (.

2. so use the Icon Slot field in the state that you want to change. To scale an image to fit a target Button. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. FIG. Select the button that you want to add an Icon to (with the Selection tool).11 or higher) . 5. where you can select the desired icon (FIG.Bitmap Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. 3.Working With Buttons 4.. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the button (FIG. 107). Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. open the image in any graphics editor program. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Button. 107 State Properties . Since Icon assignment is a state-specific property. To check the size of the Buttons in your project. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. 108 State Properties . you can apply Icons to buttons in your project. or only on specific states. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. you can add or change the button Icon assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1.Icon Slot Button icons are state-specific.) button (FIG. FIG. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. to serve as the foreground image (see Z-Order for details). This enables the browse (. or use the Icon Slot field under All States to add the icon to every state in the button. so keep in mind wether you want the icon to occur on all states. 108). TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Button. 109).. Adding an Icon to a Button With TPD4. click on the Icon Slot field in the state that you want add the icon to. 104 TPDesign4 (v2.

109 Select Resource dialog If you don't see the desired image file listed in the Select Resource dialog. 5.Working With Buttons FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. FIG. 110 State Properties . 4. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.11 or higher) 105 . Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the icon on the button (FIG. 110).Icon Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image.

you can take advantage of transparency support in TPD4. there are a few key concepts to understand: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4.Working With Buttons Working With Transparent Backgrounds When you are applying an icon. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. you'll wind up with something like this (FIG. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. 111): FIG. 112 Button With Image and Icon Obviously you don't want that unsightly box framing the icon! You need to edit the icon's fill color and make the background color transparent. you can effectively change the shape of the image. and select transparent as the fill color. Typically transparency is used in images for the background color. 113 Button With Image and Icon using transparent background Check the documentation for your image-editing program to learn about applying transparency to your images. For example. 112): FIG. When using images with transparencies in TPD4. by making the background color transparent. to accommodate layering of images without trying to match colors across layers. you will apply a fill to the areas that you want to appear transparent (in most cases the background). However. Generally speaking. just like you would for any other color in the palette. if you have a button with an image (FIG. With a transparent background color. the icon actually retains its original rectangular shape. Raster images are always created in the shape of a rectangle. 106 TPDesign4 (v2. but will display without the background (FIG. Unless you are actually using transparency. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. 111 Button With Image and you apply an icon that doesn't use transparent as the background color. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. 113): FIG.11 or higher) . only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color.

select the button in the Design View window. 2.11 or higher) 107 . Adding Text Effects To add a text effect to a button. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Text Effect. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. 115 Text Effect drop-down menu (State Property) For List Box buttons. Alternatively. organize and cross-link your control pages. A basic example would be a button labeled "DVD Player" on a main page that when touched.Working With Buttons Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (FIG. containing only buttons that control the DVD player. 114). use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). In the Properties Control window . Page Flips A basic touch panel page design concept is the Page Flip. To apply the video fill across all states. 115): FIG. A page flip is a button attribute that allows the user to press a button to "flip" through different panel pages. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. Typically you would set up a different control page for each piece of equipment. FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. 3. and page flips allow you to separate. Since this is a state-oriented setting. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. Popup Page or Button. and select a text effect from the Text Effect (State) Property (FIG.States Tab. opens a DVD Player page. 114 Video Fill drop-down menu (State Property) The Video Fill options presented will depend on the panel type selected for this project. Organization of device controls is essential to good touch panel design.

you may need to also specify the target page. Depending on the type of page flip action selected..Working With Buttons Creating a Page Flip 1. 2. 116 Button Page Flip Actions dialog 4. 117). popup page or popup group to open. In the Properties Control window (General tab). Click the Add command button to create a new page flip for this button. 117 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Page Flip Actions drop-down menu) 5.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog (FIG.. click on Page Flip to enable the editable field. Click the down arrow in the Target column to select the target of the selected Page Flip Action (FIG. 116).11 or higher) . 3. FIG. and access a drop-down list of Page Flip Actions (FIG. Click the browse button (. 118). Select a (or create a new) button. FIG. 108 TPDesign4 (v2. See the Page Flip Actions section on page 109.

Alternatively. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Multiple Standard page flips are allowed.11 or higher) 109 . the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. 118 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Target page selection) 6. and specify the target page. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to show when the button is touched). you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Window (General tab). Show Popup . Hide Popup . dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. Page Flip Actions With a button selected in a Design View window. By default. TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab). By default. Select a target page for the page flip. Click the Add command button to access the Page Flip Actions drop-down list which allows you to select from a list of available page flip actions: Standard Page . where you can set the type of page flip to apply to the selected button. Alternatively.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. If dragged with the right mouse button. Use the up and down arrows to re-arrange the order of the page flips if necessary.Working With Buttons FIG. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). Previous Page . dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. TPDesign4 (v2. and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. You can apply multiple page flips to any button. the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. Repeat this process as desired to create multiple page flips on the button. click Page Flip in the Properties Control window (General tab) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog. Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab). you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Control window (General tab). If dragged with the right mouse button.This selection sets the page flip to go to the previous page (relative to the order of existing page flips) when the button is touched.

110 TPDesign4 (v2. which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows. this can cause color shifting on the button. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window.11 or higher) . but does not retain the source page in the page flip stack (which is used to execute previous page flips). the pasted items will attempt to maintain their size. flip to page two. Hide Popups on Page . Show Popup and Hide Popup for the same Popup Page are allowed on the same button. Copying/Pasting Buttons The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. since it is not a valid Address Port number. This means the last thing selected. only adjusting the properties required for them to properly fit on the target popup page. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). the location or dimensions of the copied buttons exceeds the boundaries of the target popup page. Hide Popup Group . Page Flip Forget .This selection sets the page flip to clear all popup pages when the button is touched. Copying Buttons Copying a button or buttons from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired buttons in an active Design View window then either selecting Edit > Copy from the main menu or by clicking the Copy button in the main toolbar. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. flip to page three. and you perform a "Copy".Pages tab (no open Design View window required) or (2) the active Design View window. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). Multiple Popup actions like Toggle popup. Select the page that you want to hide the popups on when the button is touched. bitmaps. even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup page groups in your project. This allows the user start on page one. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to toggle hide/show when the button is touched).Working With Buttons Toggle Popup . Use this option when you do not wish to return to the page that initiated the page flip when a subsequent previous page flip action is performed. Hide All Popups . the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button).This selection flips to the page specified. Select a target popup page group for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). If. when copying buttons from a page to a popup page. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project. Pasting Buttons You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied button or buttons onto: (1) a page or popup page name in the Workspace Navigator window .This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. then with a previous page flip go directly back to page one. For example. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette.

or by left-clicking on the background of the page or popup page. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. and enter (type or select) a new value in the corresponding field. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. If the value is inappropriate for the selected object. the Prev or Next button.11 or higher) 111 . or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. You can also select multiple buttons. either press the Enter key. TPDesign4 (v2. you will be notified via a message. using any of the following techniques: Hold the Shift key and left-click.Working With Buttons Editing Button Properties Edit Button Properties via the Properties Window: select the button property that you wish to modify. and the previous value will be replaced in the box. Once a property has been modified. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. You can de-select a button by either selecting another button. then clicking on the desired button. or left click the mouse in any box other than the current box to apply the change. Editing Multiple Selections Buttons may be acted upon individually by clicking the Selection Tool from the toolbar or selecting Edit > Selection Tool from the main menu. Click and drag outside the boundaries of the desired buttons to perform a marquis selection.

click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. string and text length = 4096 characters. The following button properties are supported for General buttons: General Buttons . you can either set the item manually. To edit any of the properties in the table. FIG. select from a drop-down menu. or both. as opposed to other button types. which have specific functionalities.11 or higher) . Depending on the item selected. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 112 TPDesign4 (v2. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. 119 General Properties: Type (General button) Setting Properties: General Buttons Once you have created a General button.Working With Buttons General Buttons General buttons are basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. Programming and State button properties. and are not associated with a specific functionality.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command.

you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General.Working With Buttons Multi-State General Buttons Multi-State General buttons are basic multi-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. select from a drop-down menu. Depending on the item selected.11 or higher) 113 . 120 General Properties: Type (Multi-State General button) Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State General button. Programming and State button properties. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. FIG.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style State Count Animate Time Up Animate Time Down Auto-Repeat Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. string and text length = 4096 characters. and that support up to 256 states. you can either set the item manually. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. or both. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State General buttons: Multi-State General Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table.

Set the top of the level range (0-255). Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. For example. • Range Low: • Range High: • Level Control Repeat (Relative Level Control only): Set the bottom of the level range (0-255). For Relative level control. this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. if this value is set to 1000. Select or enter the level code sent to the master on the selected port. For Absolute level control. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time.Working With Buttons Level Control Parameters The Level Control Type options (set in the Programming tab of the Properties Control Window) allow General and Multi-State General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. For relative level control. These options require the following additional parameters to be defined: Level Control Parameters • Level Port: • Level Code: • Level Control Value: Select or enter the port to which the Level code will be applied. Select AutoAssign to automatically assign the level code to this button. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for relative level control. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button.11 or higher) . Relative or None): Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. • Range Time Up: • Range Time Down: 114 TPDesign4 (v2.

you can either set the item manually. The following button properties are supported for Bargraph buttons: Bargraph General Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 121 General Properties: Type (Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Bargraph button. Depending on the item selected. or both.Working With Buttons Bargraph Buttons Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. select from a drop-down menu. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/ edit general (non-state oriented) button properties.11 or higher) 115 . string and text length = 4096 characters.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Value Direction Slider Name Slider Color Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. FIG. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2.

select from a drop-down menu. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 116 TPDesign4 (v2. or both. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. you can either set the item manually.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style State Count Disabled Hidden Value Direction Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. To edit any of the properties in the table. and that (like Multi-State General buttons) support up to 256 states. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State Bargraph buttons: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons . string and text length = 4096 characters. FIG. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) . Depending on the item selected. Multi-State Bargraph buttons also allow you to create a custom bargraph slider (using an image icon). 122 General Properties: Type (Multi-State Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State Bargraph button.Working With Buttons Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Multi-State Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. Programming and State button properties. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects.

range (range high .range low) $$ .raw level value $L .range low) $R .level percentage $V .range low $H . Formatting Codes Formatting codes can be used in the Text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.Working With Buttons Slider Types There are several slider types available for use with Bargraph buttons.range high $A . selectable via the General tab of the Properties Control window): FIG. 123 Slider Types Slider types are not available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons.$ character TPDesign4 (v2.adjusted level value (raw level value . The following formatting codes will be replaced with the identified values: $P .11 or higher) 117 .

124). Also note that unlike regular bargraph buttons. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. Apply a Icon Slot assignment to State 1. you'll be animating a change in levels as opposed to a push/release. like multi-state General buttons.. there are no slider-oriented settings to make in the Properties Control window.Working With Buttons Creating a Custom Slider Multi-State Bargraph buttons work differently than regular Bargraph buttons. The start position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the bottom of the bargraph (representing the minimum level setting). 4. 2. FIG.11 or higher) . 124 Image and Text Positioning dialog 6. You adjust a level. that there is no slider indicated on the button (in the Design View window). move the icon into the position that you want to be the "start position" for the bargraph slider. 5. click the Browse button (. Custom sliders on Multi-state Bargraph Buttons work on the panel basically the same as regular sliders. you touch the bargraph button and move the slider up and down (or side to side on a horizontal Bargraph button). Rather than assign a prepared slider. 3. To create a custom slider: 1. Note that when you draw a Multi-State Bargraph button. as on Multi-State General buttons..) to open the Image and Text Positioning dialog (FIG. Set the Icon Justification to Absolute. Create a Multi-State Bargraph button. 118 TPDesign4 (v2. Select State 1 in the Properties Control Window (States tab). you can animate an icon across the states to serve as a custom slider. In the case of Bargraph buttons. In the Icon X Offset state property. use up to 255 states to animate the button action. or in the State Manager window. This is because multi-state bargraph buttons. like you would for a normal Bargraph button.

8. Keep this in mind when setting up a custom slider. 125 shows the State Manager Window with 10 states: FIG. 125 State Manager Window (showing Multi-State Bargraph button with 10 states) Keep in mind that the more states used to animate the movement of the icon. move the icon into the position that you want to be the "end position" for the bargraph slider. which does not contain the icon (the original State 2 setting). the smoother and more accurate the slider will be. and ending at the top. Multi-State Bargraph buttons are always oriented vertically. or in the State Manager window. duplicating State 1 (containing the icon).e. In the State Manager window. Ctrl+click to select just the first and last states. Add States to the button (up to 255 total). The end position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the top of the bargraph (representing the maximum level setting). In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. The range of motion (i. The user will always press and drag the slider up and down to adjust the level. you'll want to delete the "extra" state at the end of the sequence.Working With Buttons One key difference between regular and Multi-State Bargraph buttons is the way they work on the panel. Select the last State in the Properties Control Window (States tab). When you close the Image and Text Positioning dialog. the icon’s new position in the last State is indicated in the State Manager window (FIG. Always begin the icon animation starting (at State 1) at the bottom position. the size of the button that the icon will travel across) needed for the slider should be taken in to consideration as well. but while regular bargraph buttons can be set as either horizontal or vertical. Generally.11 or higher) 119 . 126 State Manager Window (new Icon position for final State) 10. 9. 126): FIG. The button action is the same (press the bargraph slider and drag to adjust the level). 7. TPDesign4 (v2. A "short" bargraph button would require less states to create a smooth motion than a "long" one (that for example spans the entire touch panel page). FIG.

See the Working With Animation Effects section on page 223. 128). 128 General Properties .. 120 TPDesign4 (v2. and the red-channel values represent the overall value to change the control to.) next to Touch Map to select an image to use as a Touch Map (via the Resource Manager).Touch Map Click the browse button (. Remember. Working With Touch Maps TPD4 supports Touch Maps for Multi-State Bargraph buttons. The alpha values in the selected image represent the areas where touch will be registered. Touch Map images allow you to use irregular shapes for active bargraph buttons. 127).. Right-click on either of the selected states and select Slot Position from the Tweeners sub-menu. open the Button Preview window.Working With Buttons 11. 127 State Manager Window (showing tweened Icon Position) To preview the custom slider in action. The results of the tweening are displayed in the State Manager window (FIG.11 or higher) . an additional state property is enabled (displayed directly below Value Direction in the Properties Control window) called Touch Map (FIG. FIG. FIG. If you select Touch Map as the Value Direction (General property). and click and drag the cursor up and down within the button to move the slider up and down. you can also utilize the other tweeners in conjunction with the custom slider to create complex color transition effects.

To edit any of the properties in the table.Working With Buttons Joystick Buttons Joystick buttons are vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). Depending on the item selected.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden Cursor Name Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Aux Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. 129 General Properties: Type (Joystick button) Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). select from a drop-down menu. FIG. there is no On state associated with them. as is reflected in the State tab of the Properties Control window. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons Once you have created a Joystick button. or both. Programming and State button properties. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. Joystick buttons only use the Off state. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. The following button properties are supported for Joystick buttons: Joystick Buttons .11 or higher) 121 . string and text length = 4096 characters.

Setting Properties: Text Input Buttons Once you have created a Text Input button.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Character Display Type Max Text Length Input Mask Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Note: Maximum command. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.Working With Buttons Text Input Buttons Text Input buttons are intended for user-input (using the on-screen keyboards) on the panel. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Font Text Text Effect 122 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. 130 General Properties: Type (Text Input button) Text Input buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. select from a drop-down menu. The following button properties are supported for Text Input buttons: Text Input Buttons .11 or higher) . Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table. or both. Depending on the item selected.

The following table lists the available Input Marks Operators (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Operators < > ^ Causes all characters to be converted to lowercase. Digit or space (entry not required. Letter (A to Z. entry optional).Working With Buttons Input Mask Characters The following table lists the available input mask characters. plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed). entry required. and which characters each input mask allows in any given position (for use with the Input Mask property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Characters 0 9 # L ? A a & C Digit (0 to 9. TPDesign4 (v2. Letter (A to Z. Sets the overflow flag for this field. The following table lists the available Input Mask Next Field characters (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Next Field Characters { } Start Next Field List End Next Field List Input Mask Operators Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in various ways. Digit or space (entry not required. The following table lists the available input mask ranges (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Ranges [ ] | Start Range End Range Range Separator Input Mask Next Field Characters Input Mask Next Field Characters allow the user to specify a list of characters that caused the keyboard to advance the focus to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the test into the text input area. Input Mask Ranges Input Mask Ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric values for a given field. plus and minus signs not allowed).11 or higher) 123 . Letter or digit (entry required). entry required). Letter or digit (entry optional). Any character or a space (entry optional). Any character or a space (entry required). Only one range is allowed per field and the use of a range implies numeric entry only. Causes all characters to be converted to uppercase. plus and minus signs allowed).

click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 800x600 or 1024x768). Depending on the item selected. or both. allowing you to control the PC via the Touch Panel interface (for remote control purposes). To edit any of the properties in the table.11 or higher) . Computer Control buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. 131 General Properties: Type (Computer Control button) Computer Control buttons are constrained to one of three predefined sizes (640x480. Computer Control buttons only use one state: Off. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. FIG. States Properties Fill Color Text Color Overall Opacity 124 TPDesign4 (v2. Computer Control buttons support password protection separate from any additional username/ password credentials that the user may require to access the remote system once the connection has been made. Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons Once you have created a Computer Control button. select from a drop-down menu. string and text length = 4096 characters. The following button properties are supported for Computer Control buttons: Computer Control Buttons . you can either set the item manually. Programming and State button properties.Working With Buttons Computer Control Buttons Computer Control buttons provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Disabled Hidden Remote Host Remote Port Password Color Depth Compression Scale To Fit TakeNote Enabled Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command.

you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. 132 General Properties: Type (TakeNote button) TakeNote buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. Depending on the item selected. The following button properties are supported for TakeNote buttons: TakeNote Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. allowing you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. Programming and State button properties. string and text length = 4096 characters. or both.11 or higher) 125 . select from a drop-down menu. Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons Once you have created a TakeNote button.Working With Buttons TakeNote Buttons TakeNote buttons work in conjunction with G4 Computer Control to provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. FIG.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden TakeNote Host TakeNote Port Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command.

These selections become the default text settings for all subsequent buttons. Click the down-arrow on the first drop-down menu to the right of the State button to select the Type of button you want to create (default = general). Click the down-arrow on the second palette button (see FIG. as the drop down lists contained on the toolbar do not support this type of docking. border family. Button Draw Tool FIG. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. 4. the Drawing toolbar becomes activated. This toolbar can either be free floating or docked. You can control the button type. Click the down-arrow on the third palette button (see FIG. until the Button Type selection is changed. 8. this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. 126 TPDesign4 (v2. This way. Click the down-arrow on the first palette button (see FIG. button fill color. border color and text color.Working With Buttons Setting Default New Button Parameters Use the Drawing toolbar to set the default new button parameters (FIG. 133). Use the next two drop-down menus to specify a Font and Font Size as the default text attributes for new buttons. font size. 133) to set the Text Color for the button. but cannot be docked in a vertical fashion. 133) to set the Fill Color for the button. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Again. 3. When the Button Draw tool is selected. 7. you can quickly create sets of buttons that are visually consistent. 5. This toolbar is normally at the top of your screen and provides you with a mechanism for controlling various elements of future button creation. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons.11 or higher) . until the Border Style selection is changed. this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Select the Button Draw tool from the Selection/Draw toolbar (FIG. Of course. 133 Drawing toolbar The settings that are specified in this toolbar become the default settings for all new buttons. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG. font. The Drawing toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. until the Border Color setting is changed. until the Text Color setting is changed. until the Fill Color setting is changed. 133) to set the Border Color for the button. To set new button parameters: 1. 6. until the Font and Font Size specifications are changed. On the extreme left side of the toolbar. you will see a button that will allow you to toggle the default choices for both the Off and the On state of a button. Click the down-arrow on the second drop-down menu (to the right of the Button Type drop-down) to select a Border Style for the button. 134). 134 Draw Tools (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) 2. until the settings are changed.

When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. Decrease. 135 Order Assist toolbar Send to Front/Send To Back . Increase. TPDesign4 (v2. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. Position Assist and Size Assist toolbars contain shortcuts to many layout and design control options for controlling various elements of existing button(s) size and position. Right. Vertical Spacing (Equal. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button).Use the Align commands to quickly align selected buttons on the page. Horizontal Spacing (Equal. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. 135 describes the tools in the Order Assist toolbar: Send To Back Send To Front Shift Up Shift Down FIG. Choose which Align tool to use based on the shape and size of the selected buttons. Horizontal Center. Center Horizontal/Vertical . select equal spacing.Working With Buttons Using the Drawing Assist Features The Order Assist. Remove . To distribute buttons evenly on the page. Vertical Center. 136 Position Assist toolbar Vertical Spacing tools Align: Left. Decrease. relative to each other (not relative to the area of the page). and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). You must select at least two buttons to enable the Align options. 136 describes the tools in the Position Assist toolbar: Align tools Horizontal Spacing tools Center tools FIG. and the desired design effect. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). To distribute buttons evenly on the page. Bottom . use these commands to shift the selected button(s) up and down just one layer on the page (as opposed to placing them on just the top or bottom layer). Order Assist toolbar FIG. Remove) .When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. Shift Up/Shift Down .Use these commands to control the vertical spacing between selected buttons.Use these commands to control the horizontal spacing between selected buttons. Position Assist toolbar FIG. use these commands to place the selected button(s) to either the top or bottom layer on the page. then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. then increase or decrease spacing as necessary.Use these commands to quickly center one or more selected buttons either Horizontally or Vertically on the page. select equal spacing. Top. Increase.11 or higher) 127 .

Click this command to resize the button to become a perfect circle. 137 describes the tools in the Size Assist toolbar: Make Same tools Make Ideal For Border Increase Height/Width for Border tools Size To Image Aspect Ratio FIG. Click this button to select from the drop-down menu: 4:3 Video 16:9 Letterbox Video 16:9 Anamorphic Video 1. 137 Size Assist toolbar Make Same Width/Height/Size . As a design concept. Oval and Diamond border types. and click one of these commands. and the selected border type. Size To Image .Select a button that has the width or height that you want to match. and draw a circle that is smaller than 150 pixels in diameter (or not perfectly round).85:1 Letterbox Video 1.Select a button that has either a bitmap or icon image assigned to it. or cropped by the border style). then select the button(s) that you want to resize.35:1 Anamorphic Video Make Ideal For Border .11 or higher) . For example. For example.These commands are like nudge controls for button width and height. the Increase/ Decrease Width commands will always adjust the width on the right side of the selected button(s). the Circle and Oval border types are more problematic in terms of potential image cropping than are rectangular borders (assuming the associated image is rectangular).This tool allows you to set the aspect ratio (for use with video fills). and click Size To Image to automatically resize the button to the same size as it's associated bitmap or icon. try to choose button border styles that accommodate and compliment the button image (if there is one). Note that since all measurements in TPD4 are zero-based. Increase/Decrease Width/Height For Border . Depending on the size of the button.Working With Buttons Size Assist toolbar FIG. All selected buttons are resized to match the width or height of the controlling button (the first button selected). and the Increase/Decrease Height command will always adjust the height on the bottom side of the selected button(s). Note that the border uses some of the interior area of the button. Click these buttons to adjust the button width/height in increments specific to the selected border.85:1 Anamorphic Video 2. This option is typically for use with the Circle. Aspect Ratio . Size To Image may appear to resize the button to be too small to display the entire image (because part of the image is hidden. 128 TPDesign4 (v2.This command automatically resizes the selected button(s) to the smallest size possible that still accommodates the selected border.35:1 Letterbox Video 2. the resulting button will not appear as a perfect circle. if you create a button with the border "Circle 150".

centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. bottom edges: Aligns the bottom edges of all selected buttons. top edges to bottom: Aligns the top edges of selected buttons to the bottom edge of the button that was selected first. right edges: Aligns the right edges of all selected buttons. Horizontal . bottom edges to top: Aligns the bottom edges of selected buttons to the top edge of the button that was selected first. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. right edges to left: Aligns the right edges of selected buttons to the left edge of the button that was selected first. left edges to right: Aligns the left edges of selected buttons to the right edge of the button that was selected first.11 or higher) 129 .select the type of vertical alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting).The horizontal alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. you must have more than one button selected (in a Design View window). top edges: Aligns the top edges of all selected buttons. bottom. right to left spacing: Aligns the right edge of the first selected button to the left edge of the next selected button. left or right). Use the options in this dialog to align and/or resize the selected buttons. Vertical. 138). vertically (or both) along either the centers of the buttons. Offset . FIG. left edges: Aligns the left edges of all selected buttons. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 .Working With Buttons Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog To access this dialog. 138 Alignment & Sizing dialog The options in this dialog include: Alignment .These options allow you to align the selected buttons horizontally.select the type of horizontal alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting).the horizontal measurement of the selected panel in pixels). Select Layout > Alignment & Sizing to access this dialog (FIG. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. Default = 0. left to right spacing: Aligns the left edge of the first selected button to the right edge of the next selected button. TPDesign4 (v2. Positive values offset the selections to the right. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. negative values offset them to the left. or along any edge (top.

All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Select the button that you want to preview.specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections width (positive values add pixels.Working With Buttons top to bottom spacing: Aligns the top edge of the first selected button to the bottom edge of the next selected button. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. 2.11 or higher) . Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 . Initially the button is shown in its Off state. bottom to top spacing: Aligns the bottom edge of the first selected button to the top edge of the next selected button.the vertical measurement of the selected panel in pixels). The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Button Preview functions the same as for a General button with no text or graphics. 139). Previewing a Button The Button Preview Window allows you to preview a button so you can check size. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. 3. border. text and color settings on a Push and Release of the button. height or both. 130 TPDesign4 (v2.Resizes all selected buttons to match the width of the button that was selected first. Make Same Height .specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections height (positive values add pixels. Button Preview for List Box Buttons is only supported for a selected child button in unmanaged mode. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. Click on the Push button. but will not have any data linkage. Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. but initially it opens undocked. negative values subtract). Make Same Width .These options allow you to resize the selected buttons to make them match in width. the Button Preview window is fully dockable. In this case. Change . Offset . 139 Button Preview window Like the other windows in TPD4. negative values subtract). Change . Button Preview is not available for Joystick buttons. FIG. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally.The vertical alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. Default = 0.Resizes all selected buttons to match the height of the button that was selected first. To preview a button: 1. Sizing .

It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. 141). In the Programming tab of the Properties window. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Date Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG. 140). 142). FIG. To create a date button: 1. 2. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Creating a Date Button A Date Button is a button that displays the current date on the panel. The button can be of any type. but normally you would use the General button type. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. Create a new button. click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. 140 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. 141 Address Code drop-down menu 5.11 or higher) 131 . 3. FIG.

Working With Buttons FIG. dd/mm/yyyy. FIG. Select the desired display format (Weekday. but normally you would use the General button type. Creating a Time Button A Time Button is a button that displays the current time on the panel. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. In the Programming tab of the Properties window.11 or higher) . To create a time button: 1. The button can be of any type. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button.Date Display drop-down menu 6. 132 TPDesign4 (v2. 141). 3. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. 2. 143). 142 Address Code . Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. 143 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. Create a new button. yyyy-mm-dd. etc).

Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. 144 Address Code drop-down menu 5. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Time Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG. 145 Address Code . Standard or Standard AM/PM). FIG.Time Display drop-down menu 6. TPDesign4 (v2. Select the desired display format (24-hour. 145).11 or higher) 133 . The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel.Working With Buttons FIG.

Working With Buttons 134 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

cursor down. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. the options include: Default Configuration . or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. and MVP-8400 panels. The global. which may be selected like any other button for editing.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels TPD4 supports copying and converting the properties for programmable external controls (external pushbuttons and LEDs) for NXD-CV5. TPDesign4 (v2. MVP-7500.for use with a standard MIO R-4. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. As with the panel resolution. External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options.e. which may be selected like any other button for editing. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled).Working With External Controls Working With External Controls Overview TPD4 supports editing the properties for programmable external controls for panels that feature external pushbuttons and LEDs (including R-4 remote controllers). If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. Keypad with Transport Functions . this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. Teletext keypad . Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). NXD-CV7. TPD4 supports copying and converting external controls between panels: When copying a page between panels. the External Button Options list is empty. cursor left. or cursor select). panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions . i. "<none>". You can edit external control properties on both a panel-wide basis and on a page specific buttonby-button basis. cursor up. the configuration of the source external controls are copied to the destination controls according to the type of control (general. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. The global. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. LED. cursor right.11 or higher) 135 . If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons.

you can either set the item manually. or both. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. cursor up. Depending on the item selected. string and text length = 4096 characters. 136 TPDesign4 (v2. or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. 3. the configuration of the source panel's external controls are copied to the destination panel's controls according to the type of control (general. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons). Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. 2. The following global button properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. To edit any of the properties in the table.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. 1. select from a drop-down menu. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. or cursor select. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Setting Global Properties for External LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons and LEDs). cursor right. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls (pushbuttons and LEDs) are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window).Working With External Controls When copying a page between panels. cursor left. LED. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window).11 or higher) . cursor down. Once you have selected an external button. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general external control properties.

To edit any of the properties in the table. The following page-specific properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . 4. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties.Supported Properties General Properties Override Global Settings Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls (buttons and LEDs) on the target panel.Working With External Controls Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.This option (Yes/No) determines if the button performs the global action defined for the button. Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. Depending on the item selected.11 or higher) 137 . The following global button properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs . Once you have selected an external control. you can either set the item manually. Override Global Settings . the remainder of the external buttons properties will indicate their global values as read-only (default = No). select from a drop-down menu. string and text length = 4096 characters. or both. Double-click on a Page entry (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window) to display the selected page in a Design View Window. 3. TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general button properties. 1. If set to Yes. or if its behavior is specific to this page. Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. Select Pages > Show External Controls to change the Design View to represent the layout of the external buttons on the target panel. 2. click on an item in the righthand column to activate the field.

11 or higher) . The following page-specific properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs .Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. 138 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With External Controls Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with.

such as a MAX Home Theater server. the text that is displayed in a List Box button comes from a List Data Table. Unlike other button types where you specify the text to be displayed on the button (via the Text button state property). List box buttons can be used to allow the end-user to view data in list form. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. and can be defined statically or dynamically. you can select. The data displayed in List Box buttons comes from an associated List Data Table. since subordinate buttons only operate as a display of list data. List Box buttons are visible in TPD4. One example usage for List Box buttons might be to display a scrollable list of music playlists for the end-user to select and playback. The primary role of the (hidden) list box button is to retain the properties of the list box view. Further. and every button is populated with data coming from the List Data Table associated with the List Box button. The role of the subordinate buttons is to display the data in the list box view. The List Box button is a special-purpose button type for G4 devices/panels which utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list (referred to as a "list box view"). Strict alignment and spacing rules are forced both by the view and in the properties the user may edit.11 or higher) 139 . For example. individual button properties are not accessible. and you can specify how the List Box button displays the data (via General and State Button Properties). In many ways. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. Subordinate buttons are created by adding columns and/or rows to the list box container button. TPDesign4 (v2. Each List Box button is associated to a List Data table. but do not have any visible properties on the panel.Managed and Unmanaged: Managed Mode: In managed mode TPD4 treats the List Box button as a Container for the Subordinate buttons. Select the List Box Container to set button properties for the entire list box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).Working With List Box Buttons Working With List Box Buttons Overview TPD4 supports adding "List Box" buttons to projects created from panel types that support List Box buttons. You can select subordinate buttons by the column to set button properties that affect only the affected column. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. Subordinate buttons and the List Data table: The main List Box button is referred to as the Container. List Data Tables are created in TPD4. and make selections from the list. managed mode presents properties by column. but you cannot add or delete them. Note that you cannot select individual "cells" (or buttons). TPD4 supports two modes for List Box buttons . In this case. The List Data Table is the data source for list box buttons. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. The List Box Container wraps around the Subordinate buttons which represent the display fields for data populated by the List Data Table. Instead. Subordinate buttons appear in a grid fashion. Think of a table where each cell is a button. Unmanaged Mode: You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. It also presents properties for the list box button and properties for each column. Once in unmanaged mode the only way to put the list box back in the managed mode is by using the Undo feature. the song titles displayed in the list box buttons are provided by a server. List Box buttons are set up like tables in TPD4. There are three main aspects to List Box buttons: the Container button. in that they use Rows and Columns to organize the data to be displayed. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. via options in the Edit List Tables dialog. not as individually customizable buttons. In unmanaged mode.

you can select. 146). Select View>Toolbars>List Box Toolbar to show/hide this toolbar: Add Row: Click to add a row to the selected List Box Button. Delete Row: Click to delete the last row from a selected List Box Button. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. In managed mode. You also cannot access the channel port and code properties of the subordinate buttons. create. click and drag using the handle (the single vertical bar) at the far-left side of the toolbar. add columns and/or rows to the list box button. To create subordinate buttons. or delete individual subordinate buttons. its subordinate buttons are managed strictly via edits performed on the list box button or its columns. remove columns and/or rows. Add Row Add Column Delete Column Delete Row FIG. and should be considered an advanced mode for seasoned programmers only. Delete Column: Click to delete the selected column from a selected List Box Button. Changing any properties such as colors. Double-click again to dock the toolbar. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. you cannot individually select. you cannot move the subordinate buttons around individually. borders. In unmanaged mode. Add Column: Click to add a column to the selected List Box Button. double-click anywhere inside the toolbar (but not on a toolbar button). 146 List Box Toolbar All toolbars in TPD4 are dockable. 140 TPDesign4 (v2. To undock any toolbar. List Box button support is limited to the following G4 devices: MIO R-4 Remotes List Box Toolbar The List Box toolbar contains shortcuts to the Selection and Button Draw tools (FIG. G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons At the time of this release. In managed mode. To move the toolbar. or modify their Z-Order. so they can be arranged within the application window. List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is in managed mode. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons.Working With List Box Buttons The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. To delete subordinate buttons.11 or higher) . or fonts for subordinate buttons are done on a column-by-column basis. You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox).

showing container 3. 2. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. 150): TPDesign4 (v2. This way you can see the container (FIG. 146 on page 140). To create a list box button: 1. If the background color of the page is white. The example below shows a List Box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. 147): List Box Draw Tool FIG. 147 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. 149 list box button . you will not see the container. You can select the container and change the border color to black.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Managed Mode Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) By default. 148 list box button with one subordinate button By default the list box container is created with a transparent background and a white border. This property is only visible in TPD4 and will not appear on the panel. In managed mode you add subordinate buttons by adding columns or rows to the list box. Create a list box button by holding down the right mouse button on the view and dragging the mouse.11 or higher) 141 . This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar (see FIG. 149): FIG. 148): FIG.

Adding Rows 1. This function adds a row to the bottom of the list box container (FIG. Fill Color. 151 List Box button 2. 151).) as the button above it. border color. Border Color etc. 142 TPDesign4 (v2. the Drawing Tools toolbar can be used to set the border type. 152 List Box button . Click the Add Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). each button will have the same state properties (i. fill color and text color for the on and off states of the subordinate buttons.e. when the List Box Button is created. font. 152).Working With List Box Buttons FIG. FIG.1 Row Added The height of the row will be equal to the List Row Height (general) property of the list box container. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. When a new row is added.11 or higher) . FIG. 150 List Box button with 2 columns and 3 rows When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. The number of buttons added will be equal to the List Column (general) property. The width of each button is equal to the Column Width (general) property of each column in the list box.

Click the Delete Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the bottom-most row in the list box container. Click the Delete Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the right-most column in the list box container. If a column is selected. 153 List Box button . this function is disabled. FIG. If only one row exists. the Column Display Order field will be reset to "empty".11 or higher) 143 . and is part of the Column Display Order field of the parent. 153). A column of buttons will appear on the right-hand side of the list and will contain the number of buttons equal to the List Row (general) property. After deletion the container will be resized.2 Rows 2. If only one column exists. Deleting Columns 1. 2. this function is disabled. 154 List Box button . If a column is deleted. TPDesign4 (v2. the new column will have the same width as the selected column. Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area.1 Column Added The width of the last column is used for the new column. 2. FIG. the preferred row property should be set back to 1.Working With List Box Buttons Adding Columns 1. This function adds a column to the righthand side of the list box container (FIG. Deleting Rows 1. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. The maximum number of column allowed in a List Box Button is 20. If the preferred row is deleted. 154). Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. Click the Add Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar).

copying and pasting a managed list box works only when the list box container is selected by itself or when the list box container is selected along with other non-subordinate buttons. 155). 155 List Box Buttons . TPD4 does not support copying and/or pasting individual columns of a managed list box. pasting and deleting all the subordinate buttons for you. TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button (FIG. as shown below (FIG.Container Button Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).Container Button In Managed mode. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. 156): FIG. you can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. TPD4 takes care of copying.Container Button Selected 144 TPDesign4 (v2. All you have to do is select the container. FIG. Copying and Pasting a List Box Cutting. When one or more of the subordinate buttons are also selected. 156 List Box Button . The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. List Box Buttons .11 or higher) . Alternatively. these features are no longer available.Working With List Box Buttons Cutting.

click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. TPDesign4 (v2. additional state properties are supported. you can either set the item manually. 158 List Box Button . fill color etc (FIG. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. These properties are viewed by selecting the list box Container (FIG. since List Box Container buttons do not support multiple states. Column Properties In Managed mode. Programming and State button properties. Depending on the item selected. FIG.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Properties vs.Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons Once you have created a List Box button. The List Box button that contains all the subordinate buttons (called the List Box Container button) presents properties that deal with the list box as a whole. However. only the Off state is indicated. you select columns of the list box to change properties for all the buttons in that column such as button width. border type. select from a drop-down menu. Instead. Managed mode will not allow you to select or move buttons outside of the container. properties are split into two perspectives: 1. List Box button columns do support multiple states. 158). 157 List Box Button .11 or higher) 145 . the following Properties will appear in the Properties window. or both. 157): FIG. The other perspective is based on columns of the list box. If you select a List Box Button Column. The following button properties are supported for List Box Container buttons: If you select the List Box Container.Container Button Selected 2. When a List Box Container is selected. To edit any of the properties in the table.

Container Button Selected 2. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. you can use the General. Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). select from a drop-down menu. Programming. 159: FIG. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Buttons .11 or higher) . Depending on the item selected.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Hidden List Table Port List Table Address Column Display Order Column Sort Order List Table Wrap List Row List Column List Row Height List Preferred Row List Preferred Row Height List Column Padding List Row Padding List Offset Enabled List Managed Programming Properties Address Port Address Code States Properties Border Color Fill Color Overall Opacity Setting List Box Container Button Properties Once you have created a List Box button. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the container button. or both. 1. as shown in FIG. 159 List Box Button . you can either set the item manually. 146 TPDesign4 (v2. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. To edit any of the properties in the table.

The list box button's Row and Column properties are set to the total number of rows/columns. TPDesign4 (v2. 160 List Box Buttons .Subordinate Buttons List box buttons and subordinate buttons have a special kind of relationship to keep track of which buttons belong to the list box button. 4 and 1. The Channel Code of each subordinate button is set in sequential order starting with 1000 from left to right.4. the placement of subordinate buttons in a list box is automatic and controlled by the location of the list box container and laid out in a grid fashion.1 (FIG. the list box container is resized automatically to fit the new region of subordinate buttons added.11 or higher) 147 . When a row or column is added. List Box Buttons . Each subordinate button's Channel Port must be set to the High Port of the list box button. The list Box Button's Data Display property is a string surrounded by parenthesis. The List Box Button's Address Port and Code must be set to an Address Port/Code of a List Data Table. top to bottom.Working With List Box Buttons There are additional properties that can be applied to a selected column within the Container button. 160): FIG. For example.Subordinate Buttons Subordinate Button Placement In managed mode. top to bottom. The string is a comma-delimited list of List Table Column Values. then this property would be set to 3. Rows are added to the bottom of a list box and columns are added to the right-hand side of a list box. See the Setting List Box Button Column Properties section on page 149 for details. The subordinate button's Row and Column property is set to their row/column position. The Z-Order of all subordinate buttons must follow list box button container and continue in sequential order from left to right. if the list box's 1st 2nd and 3rd columns are assigned to columns 3.

TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button.Working With List Box Buttons Subordinate Buttons . List Box button columns support multiple states. Alternatively. as shown below (FIG.Middle Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Columns Once you have created a List Box button.Drag and Drop Capability Full drag and drop capability is supported for Subordinate List Box buttons: You can drag a column property of a list box and drop it on another column of a list box. 161): FIG. select the Container to set button properties for the Container List Box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). The list box column will highlight when dragged on top of the column in the Design View and when dropped the property will change to the value dragged from the properties window. select from a drop-down menu. You can also drag and drop one to two states in the State Manager window on a column of a List Box. Depending on the item selected. Click inside the Container to select a column. The (blue) handles indicate that a single column is selected.11 or higher) . you can use the General. Programming. 161 List Box Button . You can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. or both.Columns In Managed mode. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the columns. To edit any of the properties in the table. List Box Buttons . click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually. 148 TPDesign4 (v2.

See the Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons section on page 145 for details. or both. TPDesign4 (v2. Depending on the item selected. you can either set the item manually. If you select a column within the container (as opposed to the List Box button container itself). click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) 149 . States tabs of the Properties Control window to set/edit button properties for a selected column (within the List Box button container).Working With List Box Buttons List Box Columns . select from a drop-down menu. Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Marquee Direction Marquee Repeat Setting List Box Button Column Properties Once you have created a List Box button. Properties applied to a column will affect all buttons in that column. There are additional properties that can be applied to the List Box button container. To edit any of the properties in the table.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Width Above Popups Border Style Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output States Properties Draw Order Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Note: All of the above are available only for Bitmap Justification unmanaged list boxes. List Box buttons consist of a container and subordinate buttons that are created with Columns and Rows. you can use the General. Managed list boxes Scale Bitmap To Fit do not have any programming Icon Justification properties available. Programming. you can set button properties that apply specifically to the selected column.

The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. In other words. By removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. When a List Box button is put into Unmanaged mode: The Container. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. all of the subordinate buttons will be deleted as well. you can select. the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. the only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is via Edit > Undo. However.11 or higher) . Only certain button properties are available to edit in unmanaged mode: List Box Buttons . this functionality will carry over to unmanaged list boxes. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. moved and resized. but you cannot add or delete them. The Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Container/Subordinate buttons cannot be changed. and individual subordinate buttons can be selected. the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. individual (or multiple selection) subordinate buttons can not be deleted. Note that once a List Box button has been moved to unmanaged mode. In unmanaged mode. Rows and Columns cannot be removed nor added. it always defaults to Managed mode.Unmanaged Mode . You can choose to place a selected List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). This logic is present for managed list boxes. If the Container is deleted.Editable Properties Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • List Table Port • List Table Address • List Display • Column Sort Order • List Filter Column • List Selectable • List Table Wrap • List Preferred Row Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • Border Style 150 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is created.

The only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is to use the Undo feature. Parent and individual child buttons can be selected. a message box is given stating the reason it can not be deleted. Individual (or multiple selection) child buttons can not be deleted. If the user tries to delete one or more list box child buttons. This logic is present for managed list boxes. In other words. the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. Unmanaged transition is one-way. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. Changing Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Parent/Child is not available. the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection.Unmanaged Mode .Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons .11 or higher) 151 .) Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button Programming Properties • Address Port • Address Code • Channel Port • Channel Code Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button Programming Properties • Feedback • Address Port • Address Code • String Output Port • String Output • Command Port • Command Output State Properties: Off only • Border Color • Fill Color • Overall Opacity State Properties: Off only • Draw Order • Border Name • Border Color • Fill Color • Text Color • Text Effect Color • Overall Opacity • Bitmap Justification • Scale Bitmap To Fit • Icon Justification • Font • Text Justification • Text Effect • Word Wrap • Marquee Direction • Marquee Repeat Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons The following rules apply to List Box Buttons in Unmanaged Mode: Must be constructed from a Managed List Box (create a Managed List Box Button and change it to Unmanaged mode via the Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox) option).Editable Properties (Cont. By TPDesign4 (v2. Columns cannot be removed nor added. Parent and individual child buttons can be moved and resized. Rows cannot be removed nor added. The parent can be deleted -> all children will be deleted as well.

163 list box button with one subordinate button 3. 164 List Box Button With 2 Columns and 3 Rows 4. The Channel Port/Code of a child can not be changed via properties. To create a list box button: 1. this functionality should carry over to unmanaged list boxes. The High Port of a parent can not be changed via properties. The example below shows a list box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. Create a list box button by right clicking on the view and dragging the mouse. 164): FIG. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not.11 or higher) . Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) By default. 162 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar. 162): List Box Draw Tool FIG. 163): FIG. State properties of individual unmanaged list box button can be changed. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. 152 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Select Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox).

the other rows. 6. The program displays a warning message concerning the rules concerning unmanaged mode: Once set. The minimum height for each row is 4 pixels. FIG.Working With List Box Buttons 5. up to the number of rows present in the list box. When two or more columns are selected. the remainder is dropped. After resizing the column.Resizing When a List Box Container is resized by dragging the center handles. the List Box cannot be set back to managed mode except through the Undo feature. FIG. resizing is limited to the size of the last column plus the width left on the right hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup. 165 List Box Buttons . If the List Preferred Row is set to a non-zero value (i.11 or higher) 153 . 165). the remainder is applied to the Preferred Row Height. If Preferred Row is 0. the next column to the right will resize to reflect the change. This allows you to change the overall width of the list box. In unmanaged mode you can resize and move individual subordinate buttons of the list box but you cannot add nor delete rows and columns. List Box Buttons . 1). Click Yes to convert the List Box Button to unmanaged mode. 166). If the last column is selected. plus the offset of the parent if the List Offset Enabled (General) property is set to "yes". only the right center handle is enabled for resizing (FIG.Resizing If the change in size specified by the drag is not equally divisible by the number of rows. 166 Right center handle enabled for resizing When a single column is selected (not including the last column) resizing is limited to the width of the selected column and the next column to the right. the change in size is split evenly between each row by adding/subtracting the change in size to the Row Height and Preferred Row Height properties of the Container (FIG. When a List Box Column is selected. the maximum width allowed per column is the amount of width from the right-hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup divided by the TPDesign4 (v2.e. resizing maintains the size ratio of the preferred row vs. Use the corner resize handles to do a combination what the center handles do by resizing one of the corners.

).it is either behind or on top of the entire list box). List Box Buttons . the new width is applied from right-to-left until the maximum width is met. Page Down . a button separate from the list box cannot be behind some of the subordinate buttons of the list box and on top of the rest of the subordinate buttons . at the time that the button is created. the minimum allowed is 4 pixels. pasted. then click the Add Column button (in the List Box Toolbar). Up .Working With List Box Buttons number columns selected. Press again for an ascending re-sort. etc. If you select a column. the Z-Order (or State Draw order) of the subordinate buttons must follow the list box container's Z-Order in row-column sequential order.Move list down one entry. When resizing the width of a column. Sort Column (1-20) . Home .Move list down one page. End . Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG. the width of the new column is defined based on the last column in the list box.Navigation Buttons General buttons can be used to provide a means for the user to control a List Box button. Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. fill color and text color for the On and Off states of the subordinate buttons.Move list to top of page. When resized in this way. Z-Order placement remains managed by the list box. the properties (including width) of the new column are taken from the selected column. when the List Box Button is created. 167 Drawing toolbar When you draw a List Box button with the List Box Draw Tool. fill and text color for the List Box button's subordinate buttons. or when the list box layout is changed (bring-to-front. you can manipulate each subordinate button of an unmanaged list box. Page Up . When you add columns and rows (with the List Box Button Container selected). Only experienced programmers who fully understand list box construction and the logic of Z-Order placement should use the list box in unmanaged mode.e. deleted. For managed list boxes the Z-Order is managed for you when rows and/or columns are added. the Drawing toolbar (FIG. the specified column is sorted alpha-numerically in descending order.11 or higher) . These buttons are referred to as List Box Navigation buttons.Move list up one page. Even though you can individually select buttons in unmanaged mode. border color.Sort the specified column. For unmanaged list boxes. send-to-back. List Box Buttons . the colors are defined via the Drawing Tools Toolbar. 167) can be used to set the border. you can use the Drawing Tools Toolbar to specify the border type.Z-Order In order for a list box to function correctly on a panel.Move list up one entry. A managed list box's Z-Order cannot be interrupted by another buttons Z-Order (i. Here are the actions that a list box navigation button can perform (selectable via the Channel Code property). font. Down .Move list to end of page. On first press. 154 TPDesign4 (v2.

"List Box 2".11 or higher) 155 . 5.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. 2. The first button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 1". one above and one below the yellow button could be set to scroll the list box up and down: 6. etc. Add a general button to the page and set the Channel Port to the List Box and set the Channel Code to the desired function. Set the top button's Channel Code to "Up" and the bottom button's Channel Code to "Down". five navigation buttons (in cyan) and a scroll bar (in yellow):. they will be listed as "List Box 1". 168 illustrates a List Box (in white). All three button's Channel Port should be set to the List Box (via the Properties Control . FIG. The smaller cyan buttons. Alternatively you could leave these buttons out and program the external buttons (R4) to move the list up and down. 7.assuming that at least one List Box button is defined in the project). 4. the three large cyan button in the figure above could be used to sort columns of the list box. 168 List Box with Navigation Buttons Creating List Box Navigation Buttons 1. For example. The third button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 3". 3. TPDesign4 (v2. The second button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 2". If you haven't renamed any of the List Box buttons that have been added to this project. See the SystemGenerated Project File Names section on page 30 for details. Set both button's Channel Port to the List Box.Programming Tab .

170 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar . These bargraphs depict position only. Now you have two visual options: The first is depicted below (FIG. The size of the list is not represented. Again. Set the Level Port of the bargraph to the list box and set the Level Code to "Scroll". The user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list up and down.Level Code set to Scroll (option1) The Off state fill color is set to white and the On state fill color is set to green. the user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list.Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar One option for List Box Navigation Buttons is to link a single bargraph button to a Listbox for navigating the list data up and down.Level Code set to Scroll (option 2) Both state fill colors for On and Off are set to white.11 or higher) . The second option (shown below) uses the slider property to indicate position (FIG. 170): FIG. 169): FIG. 169 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar . 156 TPDesign4 (v2.

172 shows that the yellow bargraph is actually made up of 3 bargraph buttons labeled bg1. 171 serves as visual feedback to indicate the list size and position.Scroll Bar Components Buttons bg1 and bg2 are called Mask buttons. 171 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Components FIG. They mask portions of button bg3 to visually indicate slider position and size. It does not have any navigation capability: FIG.11 or higher) 157 .Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar The yellow button in FIG. 172 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar . To set these buttons up as a list box scroll bar set the button properties as follows: Button bg1 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: bottom mask Off Button State: Fill color set to Transparent On Button State: Fill color set to yellow TPDesign4 (v2. bg2 and bg3: FIG.

Enter the number of the column to use for alpha-numeric sorting (1-20). It is up to you to make sure a column exists in the table when defining a "Sort Column #". You can also designate dynamic List Data Table data for a List Box Button that is created at runtime by the panel firmware. and it's associated dialogs: 158 TPDesign4 (v2. the table can be designated for a list box through a property of the List Box Button. a list data table is used to manage the data of a List Box Button and can be designated through a property of the List Box Button. Navigation Buttons .Move up one entry Down .Move to Top of page End . Once created. supplied by the List Data Table). The Sort Column entries contain the column titles (up to 20 columns. However. This separates the data from the view so that List Data Table can be created statically or dynamically: TPD4 presents a list table view to create and define a static List Data Table. List Data Tables provide the information that is displayed on List Box Buttons. Once applied to a Navigation Button. Down. List Data Table TPD4 supports the ability to create..Move up one page Page Down . TPD4 will save the "List" or "Selection" version of "Up.. TPD4 displays these list values regardless of the panel type. It could have been left out leaving the background color to show through as the slider.. based on whether the PPF says the panel type supports "Selection" (i.Move down one entry Page Up . edit and delete List Data Tables in support of List Box buttons.Move down one page Home . a panel without a touch overlay." automatically. It is located behind buttons bg1 and bg2 and it's color will show through the transparent parts of bg1 and bg2 to represent the slider of the scroll bar.Working With List Box Buttons Button bg2 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: top mask Off Button State: Fill color set to yellow On Button State: Fill color set to Transparent Button bg3 is not connected to the list box. Button bg3 is not really needed. Up . 173).no navigation command will be associated with this button.Channel Code Values Channel Code values that can be applied to Navigation buttons (via the Channel Code Programming property) include: none .11 or higher) . the button will sort the list box based on this column selection. List Data Tables are created via options in the Edit List Table dialog (FIG. such as the MAX AVP). Since the purpose of List Box Buttons is to present data.Move to bottom of page Sort Column (1-20) .e.

Table Address Port . TPDesign4 (v2. Static List Box Data A static list box populates button information based on data stored on the panel. the device will resume the last known static table event should power be cycled. Therefore. Table Address Code .The Name is a character value used to identify the list table data. Dynamic List Box Data Dynamic List Box data populates button information based upon communications between the panel and a NetLinx Master. the information displayed on the device is on the master and not the device.The Address Code property is an integer value representing the address code of the list data table.11 or higher) 159 . Conversely. Opposed to static data.Select either a static or a dynamic table type. A dynamic table type is updated dynamically from the master with data. 173 Edit List Table dialog List Data Table Properties The following list data table properties are editable: Table Name . Note that unlike Dynamic List Box data.The Address Port property is an integer value representing the port of the list data table. the device cannot display current state information provided by the master.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Dynamic List data must be included in the NetLinx code running on the NetLinx Master in order to be available for use on List Box Buttons. Table Type . no raw data will be entered by the user.

which populates the associated List Box Button with the data entered into a List Data Table via the Edit List Tables dialog. FIG. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. with data defined in NetLinx Code. if the device loses power it will not be able to display the last known states. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. 4. Address: Assign a Port and Address for the table. date. with enough rows and columns to accommodate the data that you will enter into the List Data Table. 174 Create New Table dialog Name of Table: Type a unique name for the table.. 174). as well as a List Data Table. 173 on page 159). which populates the List Box Button dynamically. i. Click New to open the Create New Table dialog (FIG. Dynamic List Box Data. Number of Columns: Enter the number of columns to include in the table. 175). Click OK to save your changes and proceed to the Column Types dialog (FIG. Creating a Static List Data Table To create a Static List Data Table and associate it to a List Box Button. There are two variations on this concept: Static List Box Data. create a new List Box button. where you will specify basic properties for the new table. See the Working With Function Codes section on page 207 for more information on Ports and Addresses.e. Select Panel > Edit List Tables (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. Port: Assign a Port and Address for the table. time or temperature. See the Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 163.11 or higher) . Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. 3. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: 160 TPDesign4 (v2. so that the data in the List Data Table is displayed in the List Box button: 1. however. 2. Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to include in the table. See Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 171.Working With List Box Buttons Dynamic tables are great for creating parameters for displaying changing options. If you haven't already done so.

176).Click to add a row to the table. Add Column . Click OK to save your changes and return to the Edit List Tables dialog.11 or higher) 161 . 6. TPDesign4 (v2. At this point. Port/Channel Code . 5. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column.The column will display bitmap images from a table of bitmap references. 175 Column Types dialog Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. and specify a Port and Address to the table: Add Row . Also note that the table you just created is listed in the Tables list box (left side of the dialog). This option invokes the Add List Table Column dialog (FIG.Click to delete one or more selected rows from the table. Note that the Table Data display reflects the columns/rows and column names that you specified.Click to add a column to the table. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order. each one is added to the Tables list. The following are the available column types to select from: Text .Working With List Box Buttons FIG. resize the table.The column will display valid page names that will be activated as page flips. Delete Row . Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu.This column will contain a port/channel code combination that is sent to the master upon activation of a particular row. Page Flip . This column is hidden from the user on the display and is used as navigation. use the command buttons along the top of this dialog to add/delete rows and columns from the active table.The column will contain a variable length text value. to assign a specific type to each column. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. As you create more new tables. Icon .The column will display icons from a table of icon references. You can select any table from the list to edit its properties. Bitmap .

Assign to columns that will invoke a page flip when selected. Use the Table Port and Table Address fields to specify the port/address combination. The column type options include: Text (default) . you will be able to select a bitmap that has already been defined in the project. This option invokes the Change Port/Addr dialog. Delete Column . the user will be able to enter data.Click to delete the column that currently has focus.Click to shrink each column by equal amounts. Edit the cell data as desired: When you click inside a particular cell: If column is of the type "Text". Shrink Columns . Channel Code .Click to assign a unique Port and Address combination for the table. Port/Addr . Expand Columns . If the column is of the type "Bitmap". Power Assign .Click to resize the table to fit inside the Table Data window. Click OK to return to the Edit List Tables dialog. and code parameters to one or more selected buttons. 7. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order. If the column is of the type "Page Flip". Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu.Assign to columns that will be used to display bitmaps.Assign to columns that will be used to display icons. Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the maximum allowed width. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Icon . Page Flip . Bitmap . Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the minimum allowed width. then you will need to enter a channel port/code combination value. 162 TPDesign4 (v2.This option allows you to rename the column label at the top of a column. If the type is of the type "Channel Code".11 or higher) . 8. then a drop-down list of available pages is displayed. Rename Column . to assign a specific type to each column.Assign to columns that will be used to display channel code information.Click to open the List Table Power Assign dialog. Fit Table . Use the options in this dialog to set button-level actions.Click to expand each column by equal amounts.Assign to columns that will be used to display text. 176 Add List Table Column This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. channel/variable text.

9. 177 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3.11 or higher) 163 . Once a table is selected. 4. 1. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. In the Design View window. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields. you will be able to select an icon that has already been defined in the project.Working With List Box Buttons If the column is of the type "Icon". 177). select one or more rows and click and drag them to another spot in the table. 2.see Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 160. as well as a Static List Data Table.. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. To move rows.. TPDesign4 (v2. Select the table that you want to attach to the selected List Box Button. FIG. This dialog lists all Static List Data Tables in your project. the Table Port and Table Address fields are automatically updated with that table's port/address assignments. select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (. In the General tab of the Properties Control Window. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button.) button. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Now you will attach the List Data Table to a List Box Button .

Meatloaf. "'^LDN-5.<primary data>.4. Use Data List Commands to define List Data in your NetLinx Code. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. 4. 1 . Use double-quotes to surround fields in which commas are needed. 173 on page 159).Working With List Box Buttons Deleting a List Data Table To delete a List Data Table from your project: 1. "'^LDA-1. 2. ^LDA Adds a new row to an existing data list. in the Tables list. Click OK to proceed. 2.<list address>.Best of.<uniflag>. 3. Best of. and Anything for Love are all cells within the new row. but you can use commas within the fields.Entry5.. Select Panel > Edit List Tables to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. Primary data is required. 164 TPDesign4 (v2.No unicode. The number of data fields is limited only to the number of columns in the data list. Syntax: "'^LDN-<list port>. Syntax: "'^LDA-<list address>.. Creating a Dynamic List Data Table Dynamic List Data is provided to the associated List Box Button by the NetLinx Code running on the NetLinx Master that the panel is connected to.. column data information. Unique list addresses and names are handled programmatically.my songs'" Creates a data list of 4 columns named "my songs" and places it at port 5.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode. The program will prompt you to verify this action before the table deleted. Click the Delete command button.<list name>'" Variables: • list port = port where data resides • list address = address where data resides • column count = the number of data columns (includes hidden columns) • list name = User specified name for the data list Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.<column count>. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.Meatloaf.<data2>.0.Anything for Lunch'" Adds a text row to the data list located at address 1. 0 . 1.1. Attach the Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button There are two types of List Box Commands that can be used to define List Box Data in your NetLinx Code: Data List Commands Command Structure List View Data List Commands Data List Commands ^LDN Creates a new data list.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. address 1. • data2 = variable. Select the table that you want to delete.11 or higher) . The primary data is set as Entry5. List box commands contain comma-delimited fields.

"'^LDT-1. 1 .<primary data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode. Syntax: "'^LDD-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. 0 .<type>.No unicode. The column type starts at column 1. Syntax: "'^LDT-<list address>.Text.) ^LDR Removes a row from an existing data list Syntax: "'^LDR-<list address>. 3 .<type>. additional types sent are set in order. ^LDT Sets the column type for a data list.0.Page Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDD-1'" Deletes the data list located at address 1.11 or higher) 165 .1. ^LDC Clears all rows in a given list.<uniflag>.Channel.0..Entry5'" Removes the text row Entry5 from an existing data list at address 1. the second and third columns are also Text.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number • type = subsequent columns. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. Column is the index of the first type to set.0'" Sets the column type for the data list located at address 1. 0 .Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166). TPDesign4 (v2.. Syntax: "'^LDC-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. the first column is Text.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. "'^LDC-1'" Clears all rows in data list located at address 1. ^LDD Deletes the data list.. 4 .<column>. "'^LDR-1. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.

Music'" The field located in column 1.<column>. as indicated in the Data List Commands table: Leading and trailing spaces are ignored before and after opening and closing double quotes. in the row with the primary data "Entry5" and in the data list located at the address of 1 is a text value of Music.1. Data List Command Rules The following rules apply to several of the Data List Commands. to escape another backslash (commas do not need to be escaped).11 or higher) .<new cell data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number.Entry5. This can be used to load a data list that has long text fields. the next character is read as a literal value and the backslash is discarded. Within double quotes. • new cell data = data information for a single field or "cell" Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Double quotes must be the first non-space character after the previous delimiter (.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column.No unicode. This is to allow double quote literals within the string bounded by double quotes. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166). "'^LDL-1.) ^LDL Modifies the data in a single column field. Syntax: "'^LDL-<list address>. 1 .Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont. When a backslash is parsed. then use the backslash to escape the double quote literal.<primary data>.<uniflag>. Any data field that has a double quote literal as its first character MUST use double quotes to delimit the field. There are 2 cases in which you would use the backslash to escape a double quote literal within the field. numbering starts at 1 • uniflag = indicates unicode.) and the last nonspace character before the following delimiter (or end of command). The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.0. the backslash (\) is used as an escape character. 166 TPDesign4 (v2. 0 .

Note that the <sort> field is a bitmask. Syntax: "'^LVL-<view address>. TPDesign4 (v2.1'" Sets the data list viewed to the information located at port 2.Sort Bit 0x0002 . tells the view which of the possible orderings to use. address 1 and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5.<list address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • list port = port where list resides • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. it results in a reverse sort.7'" Displays the data list according to the view definitions located at address 1 and filters and reverse sorts the list. In most cases. but should be used in combination with the sort bit (0x0003) such that it always results in a reverse sorted list.2.Filter Reverse bit (0x0002) reverses the list from whatever order it is currently in. "'^LVL-5.11 or higher) 167 .Reverse Bit 0x0040 . When used on a reverse sorted list. When used on a sorted list. Possible values for the sort field: 0 = None 1 = Forward Sort 2 = Reverse the current list ordering (may or may not be sorted) 3 = Reverse Sort 4 = Filter 5 = Forward Sort + Filter 6 = Reverse current + filter 7 = Reverse sort + filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. the reverse bit should not be used alone. ^LVL Data list.<sort>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • sort: Bit 0x0001 . it results in a forward sorted list.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View Command Structure List View ^LVO Filter sort. set the data list displayed. so that the 3 bit positions may be combined.<list port>. Syntax: "'^LVO-<view address>. "'^LVO-1.

display a new position. Syntax: "'^LVS-<view address>...<column>. numbering starts at 1 Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.<column>. then column 2 and then column 1.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the column number to display Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.<column>. "'^LVC-3.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the starting column number Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1'" Sets the column display order to column 5 first. ^LVS Sort. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3.2. display a new position. ^LVC Column display order.-4'" Shifts the display -4 and displays the list according to the view definitions located at address 2.2.<offset>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • offset = + / .. Syntax: "'^LVC-<view address>. "'^LVS-3.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont.) ^LVP Set position. Syntax: "'^LVP-<view address>. 168 TPDesign4 (v2.<column>.numeric display shift Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.5. sets column order for sorting.1'" Sets the column sort order to column 5 first. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3. "'^LVM-2.5.3'" Sets the display position starting at the third row and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5. "'^LVP-5.<index>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • index = the row number in sequential order. then column 2 and then column 1.11 or higher) . Update must be called for changes to take effect. Syntax: "'^LVM-<view address>.... ^LVM Move. sets the table column each view column displays.

• The data is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 1.1.5] { PUSH: { //Deletes any existing data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'LVU-3'" Updates the data list and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 3. numbering starts at 1 • search data = the data on which to filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10.2. ^LVU Update. Syntax: "'^LVF-<view address>. • Filter is case sensitive. 1 . filter. DEFINE_DEVICE Keypad = 11001:1:4 Keypad2 = 11001:2:4 KeypadMusic = 11001:10:4 DEFINE_EVENT BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad.0. "'LVF-1. Setting column to 1 or data to none makes the filtered ordering the same as sorted ordering.0.<search data>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • uniflag = indicates unicode. 0 .Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont.Smith'" • Filters list based on column 2 such that only those rows whose column 2 contains Smith are displayed.my music'" //Specifies column types for the data list at address 1 starting at column 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDN-1. "'^LDD-1'" //Creates new 5-column data list at port 1.0. Note: This must be called after changes to list data.) ^LVF Filter. See Listbox Commands for more information on Listbox commands. this will update the view to any sort.3'" //Adds rows to the data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1.1"'" TPDesign4 (v2.<uniflag>. Syntax: "'^LVU-<view address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Dynamic List box Table Example The following is an example of a dynamic List Box table as it appears in NetLinx code. Dynamic List Box buttons require the same List Box navigation buttons as static tables do. or list data changes.0.0.The Shins.01.11 or higher) 169 .0. sets what column to use and what string to compare. Update must be called for changes to take effect. "'^LDT-1. "'^LDA-1.<column>. address 1 named "my music" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Chutes Too Narrow.5. Kissing the Lipless.No unicode.Uses unicode • column = the starting column number.

06.0.1] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.The Shins. "'^LDA-1. "'^LDA-1.0. "'^LVS-2.3] 170 TPDesign4 (v2. "10. Gone for Good.The Shins. Chutes Too Narrow. Chutes Too Narrow.03. Chutes Too Narrow. "'^LVC-2. "'^LVU-2'" } } BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Chutes Too Narrow. Chutes Too Narrow.02. "'^LDA-1. "10. "10.04. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by title instead of Track number BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.10"'" //Sets the column number (4) to display in the view with address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. SEND_COMMAND Keypad.11 or higher) . "10.2"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.10.7] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2. Those to Come. Chutes Too Narrow. "'^LVS-2.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10. "'^LDA-1.0.08.The Shins. "'^LVO-2.The Shins.1'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVO-2. Fighting in a Sack. "'^LDA-1.6] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2.6"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.The Shins. So Says I.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 4 which contains titles) SEND_COMMAND Keypad.5"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Saint Simon.4"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. "Mine's Not a High Horse".0. The 1 indicates forward sort. "10. "10. Pink Bullets. "10.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 1 which contains track numbers) SEND_COMMAND Keypad.9"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.2] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. "'^LDA-1.05. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by Track number instead of title BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. "'^LDA-1. Young Pilgrim.8"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0.The Shins.The Shins. SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Turn a Square. "10. Chutes Too Narrow.The Shins.09.3"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0.07. Chutes Too Narrow.0.0.7"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. The 1 indicates forward sort.0.Working With List Box Buttons SEND_COMMAND Keypad.The Shins. Chutes Too Narrow.

10] { PUSH: { SEND_COMMAND Keypad2. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (. 178 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3.4] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. TPDesign4 (v2.7] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields. 178). 1. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data to be displayed on the List Box Button. 2. Enter the Table Port and Table Address of the dynamic List Table.Working With List Box Buttons BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. In the General tab of the Properties Window.8] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic..CHANNEL). FIG. In the Design View window.9] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.']'" Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a List Box Button. select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table.0. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button.itoa(BUTTON.6] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic..5] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.[Track '.) button. 4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.11 or higher) 171 . and defined List Data in your NetLinx Code (with Data List Commands). "'^TXT-1.INPUT.

11 or higher) . FIG. 172 TPDesign4 (v2. 164).Working With List Box Buttons Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table 1. This opens the Change/Port Addr dialog (FIG. 3. Select a List Data Table (in the Tables list). showing the current Port/Address assignments for the selected table. Enter the new Port and Address assignments for this List Data Table in the Table Port and Table Address fields at the bottom of this dialog. via Panel > Edit List Tables. Click the Port/Addr command button. You can use the Power Assign feature in the Edit List Tables dialog to quickly assign Port and Channel information for multiple columns in the List Data Table. 179 Change/Port Addr dialog 4. Open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. or click the toolbar button). Click OK to save the changes and close this dialog. 2. 5. 173 on page 159). via the List Table Power Assign dialog.

11 or higher) 173 .Working With List Box Buttons TPDesign4 (v2.

Working With List Box Buttons 174 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

FIG. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value.11 or higher) 175 . Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. the value is copied to the new location. TPDesign4 (v2. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace.Working With Properties Working With Properties Overview The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). 180). Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. the selected button is named "pause". and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. popup page and button properties. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. or the Page itself). Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties Window. and the original value is left unchanged. and the button type is general. 180 Properties Window Drag and Drop Support Properties from the General tab and states from the States tab can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. With an item selected. Programming and States (FIG. When you release the mouse button. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. and drag it to another field. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms.

If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. but not on multiple states for a single button. 181). Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. FIG. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). and the Apply To All button is not depressed (FIG. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. and you select more than one button to act on. If the Apply To All button is not depressed. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. 181 Apply To All button Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. 182). select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. When you have multiple buttons selected. 176 TPDesign4 (v2. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once.11 or higher) . FIG. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. provided that the change can be applied to them all.Working With Properties Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All button is located at the bottom of the Properties Window (FIG. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. 182 Prev and Next buttons These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page.

Select Grab Properties Tool from the Edit menu. Page or Popup Page that is clicked on. 184 Property Painter dialog 3. The following example shows the Property Painter dialog invoked as a result of selecting a General-type button (FIG. FIG.Working With Properties Working With The Property Painter The Grab Properties and Paint Properties tools work together with the Property Painter dialog to allow you to grab (copy) the properties of a selected Button. Click on a Button or Page in a Design View window to take a snapshot of the properties and values of the Button. See Saving a Properties Set. Page or Popup Page. Page or Popup Page in the Design View. Click Grab Selected to grab (copy) the selected Properties. The set of selected properties (but not their values) may be named and saved for later use by entering a name in the Property Set text box. 183).11 or higher) 177 . Page or Popup Page that you want to grab. In the Property Painter dialog. This action invokes the Property Painter dialog (also accessible via the View menu). FIG. select another Button. 185). 185 Selection Tool TPDesign4 (v2. 5. the Design View context menu. 184). click the checkboxes to select the Properties of the selected Button. FIG. With the Selection tool (FIG. 183 Grab Properties Tool 2. and paint (copy) them onto another Button. Page or Popup Page: 1. 4. or click the toolbar button to activate the Grab Properties tool (FIG.

178 TPDesign4 (v2. Click Paint Selected to apply the properties that were "grabbed" from the first item to the selected item(s) (FIG.Working With Properties Hold the Shift key and left-click to apply the properties to multiple selected Buttons. 6. 186). 186 Property Painter dialog Saving a Properties Set Use the Property Set feature in the Property Painter dialog to save a set of Properties (but not their values) that can be recalled later.11 or higher) . FIG.

Border Style To change the Border Style for the selected button. Column 3 on the List Box Button will display column 5 from the List Data Table. Animate Time Down The timer intervals between states as the button animates from the On to the Off state. Column 2 on the List Box Button will display column 4 from the List Data Table. default = No). Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. and they all can all be assigned to both popup pages and buttons. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). you could enter (without quotes) "3 4 5 2 1" to populate the List Box Button as follows: Column 1 on the List Box Button will display column 3 from the List Data Table. Animate Time Up The time intervals between states as the button animates from the Off to the On state. and select the desired style from the drop-down list There are several types of border styles to choose from. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). Default = high-color (16-bit) This setting should match that of the host PC. Color Depth Select the color depth to be applied to the button. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. Auto-Repeat Select wether to apply auto-repeat to the button. from left to right. Column Display Order Enter a string of space-delimited integers to specify the order in which the columns in the List Data Table are displayed in the List Box button.Working With Properties General Properties All General properties (including Page. default = No). using a List Data Table that contains 5 columns. The options are high-color (16-bit) or true color (24-bit). click Border Style. FIG. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. Auto-repeat causes the button to constantly cycle through its states (Yes/No. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. These properties are editable via the General tab of the Properties Window: Above Popups This option allows you the selected button(s) on a Main page to always remain on top of any popup pages (Yes/No. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only.11 or higher) 179 . 187 Column Display Order For example. This option is not available for buttons on a popup page. TPDesign4 (v2.

. and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. where you can type the description. Multiple column sorting is useful when a column contains duplicates or more than one cell is empty. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. and finally column 5.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. if the user wishes to sort the table based on column 1.. This property is available for Popup Pages only. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.Working With Properties Column 4 on the List Box Button will display column 2 from the List Data Table. type any value in the Group field. where you can type the description. Click the browse (. Group Use this field to add the selected Popup Page to a specific Popup Page Group... default = No).11 or higher) . This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. when a List Data Table is assigned. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. This will create a corresponding folder under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). then column 1. The value is a space delimited string of integers representing columns in the List Data Table. Disabled Indicates how the selected button will be rendered. Description Use this text field to enter a general or functional description for this button. If however the user wishes the table data to be sorted by column 3. Click the browse (. when a List Data Table is assigned. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Display Type Click to select the display type to be invoked by this Text Input button (single line or multiple lines). Click the browse (.. Compression Select wether to compress the image on the button (Yes/No. with a space between each number) "3 1 5".. and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. 180 TPDesign4 (v2. Cursor Color Specify a color for the Joystick cursor. One or more columns can be specified. To add a group.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only.) button to select a color from the Colors dialog. the value would be (without quotes. Cursor Name Select the desired visual style for the joystick cursor. the value would be "1". Click the down arrow to select from the list of available cursor types. The default is single line. Column Sort Order Specifies the column sort order for the list table data before populating the list box control. For example. To place a popup page in a particular popup group. the button will be rendered by the panel in a subdued state (default = No). Column 5 on the List Box Button will display column 1 from the List Data Table. simply drag the desired popup pages into the desired group folder. If the button is set as Disabled (select Yes from the drop-down).

option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. you can set the X position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . suggest a proper format with fixed characters. Hidden Indicates wether or not the selected button is displayed on the panel. and/or fill the field from the right or the left. You can edit these fields to apply specific dimension info for the button. A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows to be displayed as the literal character.9999). This property is available for Popup Pages only. In some cases. the Hide Effect X Pos. the button will disappear when transferred to the panel (default = No). Hide Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. measured in 1/10th-second increments.11 or higher) 181 . in pixels. to set the input as required or optional. Input Mask This field allows you apply a mask to user input on the panel. The Height rows indicate the vertical dimensions of the selected button. to change or force character case. you can set the Y position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . to create multiple logical fields that act as a single field. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. depending on the page design and graphics. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. Depending on the Slide Hide Effect selected. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. to be invoked when the popup is closed (hidden). Hide Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the selected Hide effect. including spaces and symbols. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page.Working With Properties Height Size values. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). For example. Hide Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). characters). If the button is set as Hidden (select Yes from the drop-down). If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect (including slide/fade effects). enter any character other than those shown in the topics above. To define a literal. If you have selected a left or right slide effect (including slide/fade effects). This property is available for Popup Pages only. to specify a range of characters / numbers for each field.9999). the Hide Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Hide Effect. TPDesign4 (v2. An input mask allows you to force the user to enter the correct type of characters (numbers vs. or Hide Effect Y Pos. \A is displayed as just A.

You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. The maximum number of columns that can be set/created is 10. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). List Column Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between columns of buttons. This property is available for List Box buttons only. List Column An integer value representing the total number of columns in the List Box button. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. At creation.11 or higher) . justified vertically.Working With Properties Left Position values. The number of subordinate buttons in a column depends on the number of rows defined for the list box. List Table Port An integer value representing the port of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. and the minimum is 1. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Port number of a data table (static or dynamic). The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. in pixels. 182 TPDesign4 (v2. List Display A string formatted as a space-delimited list of table column numbers in a List Box Button that the columns of the List Data Table are assigned to. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. and only when a List Table Port is assigned. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. one subordinate button is created automatically. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. A list box column contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same width. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). to open the Attach Table To List Box dialog. The width of the first column is determined at creation by the width of the list box control.

beginning and end limits are present for the list box. When set to no. the list becomes cyclical. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). If set to "no" (default setting). the subordinate buttons will completely cover the list box container (unless List Row Padding and/or List Column Padding is set to a value greater than 0). When set to "yes". A page of table data is simply how much of the table data that can fit on the list box. List Filter Column This property sets the column order for filtering data. the next page of data will show up in the list box. This property is enabled only when a List Table Address and Port are assigned. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). List Managed This display-only field indicates wether the selected List Box Button is in Managed or Unmanaged mode. List Table Wrap This property specifies a behavior for a list box when attached to two or more pages of table data. List Table Wrap specifies that the list box will "wrap around" and start at the beginning again if the user presses the next page button when the list is at the end of the table data. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Address number of a data table (static or dynamic). It is used so that the List Box Container can be selected via the Design View. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. In this way.Working With Properties List Table Address An integer value representing the address of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. Scrolling past the beginning would wrap back around to the end of the list. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. If the user presses the scroll bar down button. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. to open the Attach Table To List Box Dialog. The same goes for scrolling up. therefore scrolling would go no further than the beginning or end of the table data.11 or higher) 183 . List Offset Enabled A flag (yes/no) indicating whether an offset of five pixels is applied to the List Box Container all the way around the subordinate buttons of the list box (default = on). This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. TPDesign4 (v2.

by enabling preferred row all marquee state properties (Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat) defined for each column are now exclusive to the preferred row. First. it can have a different height specification than all the other rows through the Preferred Row Height property. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. Second. List Row Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between rows of buttons. This button property is available for List Box Container buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only.e. The height of one row bigger than the rest is needed for easy thumb access via the touch screen. So even though a column's state has marquee enabled. At creation. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. one subordinate button is created automatically. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. List Selectable This property is a value representing the current selection type: single or multi. the height of all the buttons) excluding the preferred row. Marquee state properties are column-based properties.Working With Properties List Preferred Row An integer value designating a particular row in the list box as the preferred row. Zero "0" disables the preferred row functionality. The List Preferred Row value has the range from 0 to Row Count (default = 0). This button property is available for List Box buttons in Managed Mode only. and the minimum is 1. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. The height of the first row is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. and the Preferred Row is greater than zero "0". Only the preferred row can have a separate height specification. A list box row contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same height. The number of subordinate buttons in a row depends on the number of columns defined for the list box. All other rows are specified the same height. 184 TPDesign4 (v2. List Preferred Row Height An integer value indicating the height of the preferred row in the list box.11 or higher) . This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. List Row An integer value representing the total number of rows in the List Box button. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. List Row Height An integer value indicating the height (in pixels) of all the rows in the list box (i. only the cell in the preferred row implements the marquee feature on the panel. justified horizontally. If a row is specified (greater than 0) then the row has some special properties. The maximum number of rows that can be set/created is 50. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This is useful for Panels like the R4 where the screen is very small.

Password Protection This option allows you to apply password protection to the selected button(s). TPDesign4 (v2.. etc). or password 4). You can set up to four passwords per panel. This property is available for Popup Pages only. separated by a colon (i. Button/Popup 2. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Name To give the button a specific name other than the default Button/Popup 1. where you can type the new name. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. page and popup page. password 2. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. See the Generated Button Names section on page 99 for details. password 3. Max Text Length Use this field to specify the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered via this button. When new buttons are created. The range is 0-2000 (default = 0). default = No).. password 1. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. Default = 5900. Remote Port The port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. Button/Popup 3 etc.Working With Properties Lock Button Name This option controls how the name of the selected button is managed by the program (Yes/No. Modal This setting (Yes/No) controls the user's ability to press a button outside the boundaries of the popup page when the popup page is visible. Password The password supplied by the designer. You must use a unique name for each button.. click Name in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the text field.e. and you cannot apply the Job name (set in the New Project Wizard) to a page. "Button 2 : multi-state general". S See the Page Flips section on page 107 for details. Remote Host The IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. "Button 1 : general". Click the browse button (.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog. This password must match the password entered into the PC remote desktop server. Page Flip Use this option to assign a page flip (type and target page) to the selected button(s). This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.11 or higher) 185 . by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential two-part name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project) and button type. use this drop-down list to select which of four possible passwords to apply to the selection (none. Password Character Type a single character to be used as the password to access this Text Input button on the panel.

either the Show Effect X Pos. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. By default. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. This feature allows the state count to be changed via Edit > Find & Replace and with the Paint Properties tool. Show Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the Fade Hide effect. In some cases. Show Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. This might be desirable if the popup page contains a button which provides the end user with the ability to move the popup page at will. State Count This field indicates the number of states currently associated with the selected button. If the state count is increased. the Show Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Show Effect. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). scaling is disabled. the popup page will always appear at the position established during popup page design each time it is displayed. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect. new states are added to the end of the set as a duplicate of the last existing state. To change the state count for the selected button. This property is available for Popup Pages only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Click the browse button (.11 or higher) . On Show If this option is turned on. you can set the X position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 .9999).9999). This property is available for Multi-State (General and Bargraph) buttons only. default = No). you can set the Y position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. If you have selected a left or right slide effect.. measured in 1/10th-second increments. depending on the page design and graphics. Show Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. Slider Color Select a color to apply to the bargraph slider. 186 TPDesign4 (v2.. to be invoked when the popup is opened (shown). The default is 0 (the left edge of the page).) to open the Colors dialog. click inside the text field and enter the desired number. or Show Effect Y Pos. If the count is decreased. Depending on the Slide Show Effect selected. Scale To Fit Select wether to automatically scale the image to fit the button (Yes/No.Working With Properties Reset Pos. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. states are removed from the end of the set. Slider Name Select the desired visual style for the bargraph slider from the list of Slider types. This property is available for Popup Pages only.

default = No). the user simply presses the page (with no resulting action). and only if the Value Direction is set to Touch Map. Timeout This property allows you to specify the Popup Page Timeout. Popup Page Timeout specifies how long a popup page will remain open and active without a button press (default = 0). TakeNote Port Enter the port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button (default = 1541). If Overall Opacity is set to any other value (for partial transparency). TPDesign4 (v2. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. Similarly. Touch style describes the way buttons behave when pressed. only the icon would respond to a press. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. Touch Style This selection drop-down allows you to set a "touch style" for the selected button(s).Position values.) to select an image to use as the Touch Map image. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. in which case you may not the button to respond if the user presses outside of the circular border. if a transparent button has a visible border but no icon. If there is no other button underneath the pass through button.11 or higher) 187 . Bounding box: This touch style forces the panel to respond to a press anywhere within the rectangular boundaries of the button (regardless of transparencies or border styles). TakeNote Host Enter the IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button. in pixels. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. in 1/10th second increments. via the Select Resource dialog. by using transparencies you could create a button that appears to be round (although the actual shape of the button is rectangular). Touching the transparent areas of the button does not active the button. Active touch: This touch style limits the active touch area to the visible area of the button.. in terms of the shape and border style used.Working With Properties TakeNote Enabled Select wether to enable TakeNote functionality on the selected Computer Control button (Yes/No. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. For example. Active Touch will not work. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. To make a button totally transparent. Touch Map Click the browse button (. only the border will respond to a press. Top Left/Top . Pass through: This style allows the user to press "through" one button to press another button underneath. This button property is available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons only.. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Areas of the button that are totally transparent will not respond to a press. if you created a totally transparent button with no border and an icon. For example. Active Touch requires total transparency on the button in order to work. set the Overall Opacity (state) setting to 0. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position.

For non-multi state Bargraph buttons. the options are Vertical or Horizontal.Working With Properties Type The Type (button type) defaults to the button type that was set when the button was created.11 or higher) . click Type in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the button type drop-down menu. containing a list of all available button types. Width Size value. This property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. You can edit this field to apply specific dimension info for the button. Value Direction Click the down arrow to select the orientation of the bargraph. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. This property indicates the horizontal width in pixels of every button in the column. Horizontal. or Touch Map. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. To change a selected button's type. For Multi State Bargraph buttons. 188 TPDesign4 (v2. the options are Vertical.

Feedback Select the type of feedback to associate with this button (channel. 2.the button will always display the On state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) momentary .the button will change states (Off to On) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event inverted channel . inverted channel.the button will change states (On to Off) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event always on . The combination of Channel Port and Channel Code must be unique.11 or higher) 189 . These properties are editable via the Programming tab of the Properties Window: Address Code Select or enter the address code sent to the master on the selected port. to expand the Advanced Codes menu to show the available functions.. Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. If the Channel Port is set to 0 = Setup Port. always on. or none).Working With Properties Programing Properties All Programming properties (including Page. blink. 1. Click the '+' sign beside Computer Control.the button will change states. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. The combination of Address Port and Address Code must be unique. Click the browse button (.the button will always display the Off state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) channel . only while the button is being pressed.) to open the Enter Text dialog. Channel Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's channel code will be applied. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. none . Command Output Specify the command string sent to the master on button push. Address Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's address code will be associated.. Enter the command output and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). then click on Advanced Codes to access the advanced codes menu. you can click on Channel Code to open the Basic Codes options. momentary. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. Channel Code Select or enter the channel code sent to the master on the selected port. Command Port Select or enter the port to which the command string output will be applied. TPDesign4 (v2.the button will "blink" (switch between On and Off states) on a Push/Release Level Aux This (read-only) field indicates the auxiliary level sent to the Master on the selected port. blink . and only if a Level Code has been assigned.

Level Control Value For Absolute level control. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. if this value is set to 1000. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute.Working With Properties Level Code Select or enter the level code sent to the Master on the selected port (none.11 or higher) . Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. These options require additional Level Control parameters to be defined. Drag: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that responds to a relative touch distance on the button after the initial touch. Range Aux Inverted If set to Yes. For relative level control. 1. Select the desired level function: Display Only: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button that only displays level information (but cannot be used to control levels). this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). 190 TPDesign4 (v2. this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. For Relative level control. Select Auto-Assign to automatically assign a level code to this button. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. Active: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button for controlling levels according the other button parameters set here. to allow for glide-point style controls. For example. the user can touch anywhere inside the joystick button and move the level (according to the Range Drag Increment setting). Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons. 2 or auto-assign). The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. Drag Centering: This option creates an active drag bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. Relative or None). Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. Active Centering: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. only the Level Aux range is inverted (default = No). this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. Level Function This option is only available for Bargraph. When set to Drag. Level Control Type These options allow General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. Level Control Repeat Time This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for Relative level control. Level Port Select or enter the port to which the Level Code will be applied. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only.

Working With Properties

Range Drag Increment
This field allows you to specify the amount of change that will be registered by one full drag across the control, to allow for fine/coarse adjustments. This property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only, and only if Drag is selected as the Level Function.

Range Low
Set the bottom of the level range (0-255).

Range High
Set the top of the level range (0-255).

Range Inverted
If set to Yes, the range is inverted, so that the top of the level range is 0 and the bottom of the range is 255 on both the X and Y axis (default = No). This button property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only.

Range Time Up
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

Range Time Down
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

String Output
Specify the output string sent to the master on button push, on the specified String Output Port.

1. Click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog. 2. Enter the output string and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). String Output Port
Select or enter the port to which the String Output will be applied.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

191

Working With Properties

State Properties
All State properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the States tab of the Properties Window:

Bitmap
To apply an image file as the background image to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image file from among those imported into the project. If pairs of image resources exist that end in *off/*on, *f/*n, *0/*1, *1/*2 (case insensitive), and the first in the pair is applied to the Off state of a General button, the second will be automatically applied to the On state to make it easier to set up images on a General button.

Bitmap Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Bitmap X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Bitmap Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Border Color
To change the border color for the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Border Name
To change the Border Name for the selected button, click Border Name, and select the desired border from the drop-down list. If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab), then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none), then all border names are available in the provided list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Chameleon Image
This field allows you to apply a Chameleon Image to the selected state(s). This property is only available only if the Border Name has been set to None. Chameleon Images can be used to create special effects such animated glow and drop-shadows. Click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image to apply as a Chameleon Image.

192

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Draw Order
This field allows you to specify the order in which the elements of a button, page or popup page are drawn. By default, the draw order is: 1) fill, 2) bitmap,3) icon, 4) text, 5) border. Click the browse button (...) to access the State Draw Order dialog to change the draw order. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Fill Color
To change the fill color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For bargraph buttons, the preview image in the State Manager works differently than for the other button types. For bargraph buttons, the on and off states are used to indicate a level setting rather than a push/release. As a result, the button image in the Design View window will indicate the bargraph button as it will appear on the touch panel, but the thumbnails in the State Manager window indicate each state as a separate preview image. For example, the bargraph button shown below uses yellow as the On state fill color, and green as the Off state fill color. In the State Manager window you would see the On state (yellow) and the Off state (green) as individual thumbnails. The Button Preview window works differently for bargraph buttons than for the other button types. Rather than using the Push button to view the different states, click and drag on the slider with your mouse cursor (in the Button Preview window) to preview the feedback. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Font
To change the font used for text on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Font dialog, where you can select a Font, Style and Size for the button text. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the icon (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Slot
To apply an icon to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a slot assignment (icon) to apply.

Icon X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Icon Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

193

Working With Properties

Marquee Direction
This field allows you to specify the direction in which marquee text will move. By default, this property is set to Disabled. Click inside the field to activate the down arrow, to select from the other marquee direction options: The marquee direction options include: Disabled - When this property is set to Disabled, the text on the button will not be treated as marquee text. Scroll left - Text scrolls horizontally to the left. Scroll right - Text scrolls horizontally to the right. Ping-pong - Text "bounces" back and forth horizontally between the left and right boundaries of the button area. Scroll up - Text scrolls vertically upward. Scroll down - Text scrolls vertically downward. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Marquee Repeat
This field allows you to specify whether the marquee text element on a button will appear to repeat the text string once it has moved all the characters beyond the boundaries of the button. The movement of marquee text is specified by the Marquee Direction button state property. By default, this property is set to No. To enable repeat marquee text, click inside the field to activate the down arrow to change to Yes. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Overall Opacity
Use this field to specify the level of opacity for the selected button (0 - 255, where 0 is totally transparent, and 255 is totally opaque). The default is 255. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Scale Bitmap To Fit
This property is available only if the Bitmap selected for this button/state is a dynamic image. Note that this option is available only for Dynamo Dynamic Images (not for Dynamo Resource Images) This option scales the Dynamo Dynamic Image down to fit the container button, popup or page. It will not scale Dynamo Dynamic Images up to fit. To automatically scale the dynamic image (down only) to fit the button, click the down-arrow and select Scale To Fit (default = No). The options available for Scale Bitmap To Fit depend on the panel type associated with your project: No - The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all, and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button, popup or page. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. This is the default setting. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. 2x - This option doubles the size of the Dynamo Resource image. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. If the resulting image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit - This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Dynamic image, maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.

194

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Sound
To change or apply a new sound file to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a sound file (WAV or MP3) from among those imported into the project.

Streaming Source
Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is available only if Streaming Video is selected as the Video Fill). Streaming Video is only available as a Video Fill option if the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video.

Text
To change or enter the text to be displayed on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the new button text. Use the Preview Using Font option to view the text as it will appear in the selected font, style and size (on by default). Unicode characters may be entered via the Enter Text dialog only (not through in-place editing in the States tab of the Properties Control window). When Unicode text is input, the name of the button will not match it's Off state text. Formatting codes can be used in the state text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Text Color
To change the text color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in a selected column.

Text Effect
Text effects are graphic effects that can applied to button/page/popup text (for example, the Glow effect applies a neon glow or halo effect to the text on the selected button/state(s). Each text effect is available in several variations ((i.e. Small, Medium, Large or XtraLarge). To apply a text effect to the button text, click the browse button (...) to access the Text Effect sub-menu. This sub-menu presents all available text effects, sorted by type. Click the + symbol next to any effect type in the sub-menu to see all of the variations on that effect. Once you have selected a text effect, use the Text Effect Color field to specify a color for the effect. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Effect Color
If you have selected to apply a text effect, use this field to specify the color of the selected effect. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the button text (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column

Text X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

195

Working With Properties

Text Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

Video Cropping
Use this field to specify the number of scan lines to be removed from both the top and bottom of the video signal. For best results, set the video button's aspect ratio to match the video input aspect ratio. This property is only available if the Video Fill State property is set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video.

Video Fill
Click the down arrow to select from a drop-down list of video formats that are supported by the touch panel specified in your project. Video-capable Modero panels support Composite video, and Enhanced Modero panels support Composite, Component/RGB and Streaming video formats. If you have specified the NXP-TPI4, click the down-arrow to select from the list of available video slots on the TPI4 (video slot 1,2,3 or 4) to use as the source for this video fill. If you select Streaming Video as the Video Fill, then the Streaming Source state property is made available. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is only available for video-capable panels. See the Video Capabilities for Modero Panels section on page 5 and the Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels section on page 5 for details.

Video Touch Pass-Thru
Select Yes from the drop-down menu to enable video pass-thru (disabled by default). This property is enabled only if the Video Fill State property has been set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video. Video pass-thru allows you to pass touch/control information from a touch input device (touch panel, mouse or keyboard) through a NXP-TPI/4 to a controlled device with video-out capabilities. This feature is also used in conjunction with the MPS (mouse pass-thru) and KPS (keyboard passthru) commands.

Word Wrap
Use this option to enable the wrapping of text strings that are too long to be displayed across the page on one line. Click the down-arrow and select Yes or No from the drop-down list (default = No). Note that both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Using the All States Option
Use the All States option (in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to apply any changes you make to all states on the selected button. Note that if you have multiple buttons selected (Shift+click to select multiple buttons a page), the All States option only affects states for the button that has Edit Focus. The button with edit focus would be the last one selected, and is indicated by having red-colored square handles (as opposed to the black squares that indicate that a button is selected, but does not currently have edit focus).

196

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

188). In the Search Scope area. To search for button properties: 1. TPDesign4 (v2. you can perform a search based on button type. the Select All button is disabled. You can include any General or State button property as search criteria. click in the checkbox next to the General heading. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page. border style. In the Search Criteria table. Open the Find dialog (FIG. or across the entire Project. select the button properties to use as the search criteria. Select Select All to close the Find dialog and select every button that meets the criteria. You can specify to search for any General or State button property. select either Entire Panel or Current Page. To select all General button properties. to select all State-oriented button properties. Select Find Next to continue the search. click in the checkbox next to the States heading. the Find In Page dialog is compressed to only show the buttons that satisfy the search criteria. 4.Working With Properties Searching For Button Properties Select Edit > Find (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find dialog. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections.11 or higher) 197 . which allows you to search for any button property value either within the currently open Page. If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel. When the first instance of the criteria is found. FIG. in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. based on the specified criteria and scope. or any combination of search criteria. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. For example. 188 Find dialog 2. and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). name. use the Find Next button to search the current page only. and state count (among many others). 3.

Working With Properties

When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

Searching and Replacing Button Properties
Select Edit > Find & Replace (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find and Replace dialog, which allows you to find (and optionally replace) any button property value with another value of your choosing. You can specify the scope of the search to either the currently open Page only, or across the entire Project (FIG. 189).

FIG. 189 Find and Replace dialog,

To search and replace button properties:

1. Open the Find & Replace dialog (see above). 2. In the Search Criteria table, select the button properties to use as the search criteria. You can include any
General or State button property as search criteria. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. To select all General button properties, click in the checkbox next to the General heading; to select all State-oriented button properties, click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

3. In the Search Scope area, select either Entire Panel or Current Page.
If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel, the Select All button is disabled, in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page, use the Find Next to search the current page only, based on the specified criteria and scope.

4. In the Replace Values table, select the button properties to use as the replace values. The Replace Values
do not necessarily have to match the Search Criteria (although they may). It is also possible to replace multiple values or establish multiple search criteria. For example, to change the Border Style on one or more buttons, select Border Style in the Search Criteria table, then select the particular border style to search for from the drop-down list. Then, select

198

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Border Style in the Replace Values table, and select the desired replacement border style from the dropdown list. Repeat this process for as many other button properties as needed.

5. When the first instance of the criteria is found, the Find In Page dialog is displayed, listing the buttons
that satisfy the search criteria, and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Select Find Next to continue the search. Select Replace All to close the Find dialog select every button that meets the criteria. The program informs you of the number of buttons affected by this change. All replace actions support full Undo / Redo capabilities. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

199

Working With Properties

200

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Working With States
Overview
All G4 panel entities (Pages, popup pages and buttons) have at least one state. Pages and popup pages have only one state. General, Bargraph and Text Input buttons have only two states (on/off). Joystick buttons only use one state (Off). Multi-State General and Multi-State Bargraph buttons can have up to 256 states. States start at 1. The ability to set the State Properties (including border name, border color, fill color, text color, video fill, bitmap, bitmap justification, icon assignment, icon justification, font, text, text justification, word wrap preference and sound) is provided at the state level, via the States tab of the Properties Window.

State Manager Window
The State Manager window allows you to view and modify individual states. The State Manager window supports full Cut, Copy, Delete, Insert, Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities (FIG. 190).

FIG. 190 State Manager window - showing a multi-state button (6 states)

The State Manager context window (open via right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager) support allows the user to Add single or multiple states, Replace states, Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. For Multi-State General buttons the different states are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up) and back again to Off (Range Time Down). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. For Multi-State Bargraph buttons, the level will directly reflect the displayed state. You can set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. For buttons with multiple states, Send Commands can set the state number, provided it is not a level type button.

State Manager Context Menu
Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to add single or multiple states, replace states, insert single or multiple states, and remove states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

201

Working With States

The items in this context menu include: Size - This option sets the size of the button thumbnail views as they appear in the State Manager window. Add States - This option opens the Add States dialog, which allows you to add multiple states to the selected button (up to a total of 255 states). Insert States - This option opens the Insert States dialog, which allows you to insert multiple states to the selected button. This option inserts the specified number of states directly after the selected (highlighted) state. Quick Input - Click to open the Quick Input sub-menu, where you can specify how to use the Quick Input feature (Current Property, Text or Disabled). Use Quick Input to make fast edits to various page and button elements and properties. Cut/Copy/Paste - Use these options to either cut, copy or paste a selected button state to/from clipboard memory. Replace - Use this option to replace the selected button state with the contents of clipboard memory. Delete - Use this option to delete the selected button state(s) from the button. Select All - This option selects all states associated with the selected button. Reverse States - This option reverses the order of states selected in the State Manager window. The selected states do no have to be contiguous. Set As Display State - This option sets the state that is currently being displayed in the Design View as the display state for the button. Image/Text Positioning - This option opens the Text/Image Position dialog, which allows you to specify the position of images and/or text on the selected button state(s). Animation Wizard - This option launches the Animation Wizard. The Animation Wizard guides you through the process of creating an animated button. Tweeners - Click to open the Tweeners sub-menu where you can select from several types of tweeners to use (for animation purposes).

Adding States To a Button
There are three ways in which new states can be added to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types): Duplicating an Existing State on the Button Adding States From the Clipboard Adding States Through Drag-and-Drop

Duplicating an Existing State on the Button
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by duplicating an existing state on the button:

1. If the new states are to be added to the end of the collection (in the State Manager window), right-click to
open the State Manager Context Menu, and select Add States.

2. If the new states are to be inserted elsewhere in the collection, first select the state prior to which the new
states will be created, then right-click to open the State Manager Context Menu and select Insert States.

3. The Add States dialog (or the Insert States dialog if you selected Insert States) is displayed (FIG. 191).

FIG. 191 Add States dialog & Insert States dialogs

202

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Use these dialogs to specify the number of states to be created, and which existing state to duplicate (which will be highlighted in the State Manager as the state number is changed).

4. When the desired number of states and the state to duplicate have been chosen, press OK and the new
states will be added to the collection in the desired location. Otherwise, press Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any states.

Adding States From the Clipboard
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by pasting states from the clipboard. Pasting states from the clipboard offers more power and flexibility than single state duplication. States may be copied from another button, page, or popup page, or even from a different panel:

1. First select the button, page, or popup page whose states will be copied. 2. In the State Manager window, select the source states. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add
states to the selection. Left-click + Shift to select a range of states.

3. When the source states have been selected, copy them to the clipboard (Ctrl-C). 4. With the source states copied to the clipboard, select the Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph button to
which the states in the clipboard should be copied (in the State Manager). Select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. To add the copied states to the end of the series, ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (or select the last state in the series).

5. Paste the states from the clipboard (Ctrl-V).
When copying states from another button or from a popup page, the pasted state's border style may be modified to ensure that it is an acceptable style in the button's border family.

Drag & Drop To Add States
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to add copies of states within the same button is to use drag-anddrop:

1. First select the source state(s). Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add multiple states to the
selection. Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to select a range of states.

2. With the source states selected, press and hold the right mouse button while over one of the selected
states. While continuing to press the right mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be copied (FIG. 192).

FIG. 192 Drag & Drop To Add States

If the states are to be added to the end of the collection, drag the source states beyond the last state. If they are to be added elsewhere in the collection, drag the source states either over the state prior to which the new states will be inserted, or over the space between state thumbnails where the new states will be inserted.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

203

Working With States

3. Release the right mouse button and select Insert copy... from the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 193).

FIG. 193 Drag & Drop To Add States (Insert Copy...selected)

4. The new States are added according to the option selected in the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 194):

FIG. 194 Drag & Drop To Add States (States copied before State 3)

Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button
You can set the maximum active state on a multi-state button by selecting the last state in a sequence (in the State Manager window) and selecting the States > Set As Max Active State option. The state tagged as the max active state will be the last one included in the multi-state sequence. All states beyond the max active state are ignored when the button is pushed. Note that the states that occur after the max active state in the sequence are displayed with crosshatching across the labels on the thumbnails in the State Manager window, to indicate which states will not be included in the multi-state sequence.

Removing States From A Button
States can be removed from a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types) by either deleting them from the collection, or by cutting them to the clipboard. Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph buttons must have at least two states. Actions that would cause the number of states to drop below two are not allowed.

Deleting States 1. Select the states to be deleted. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection.
Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Delete the selected states by selecting the Edit > Delete, State Manager Context Menu > Delete, or the
Del key.

204

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Cutting States To the Clipboard 1. Select the states to be cut. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection. Hold
down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard by selecting Edit > Cut, State Manager Context Menu > Cut, or
the Ctrl-X keyboard accelerator.

Changing the Order Of States On A Button
Changing the order of states in a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button can be accomplished either through the clipboard or by drag-and-drop:

Reordering States Through the Clipboard 1. In the State Manager window, select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard (Ctrl-X). 3. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection: a. Ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (click anywhere outside of a state
thumbnail, or press ESC).

b. Then, paste the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Paste, State Manager Context Menu >
Paste, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

4. If the states are to be moved elsewhere in the collection: a. Left-click to select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. b. Then insert the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Insert, State Manager Context Menu >
Insert, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to reorder states is to use drag-and-drop.

1. Select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button while over one of the selected states. While continuing to press the
left mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be moved. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection, drag the states beyond the last state. If they are to be moved elsewhere in the collection, drag the states over the space between state thumbnails where they will be moved.

3. Release the left mouse button (the same operation can also be performed with a right mouse button dragand-drop, selecting "Move…" from the drag-and-drop menu).

Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button
Copying a State to the Clipboard
Copying a state from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired states in the State Manager then either clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu or clicking on the Copy button from the main toolbar. You may also right click and select copy from the context menu.

Pasting a State from the Clipboard
You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or by clicking the Paste toolbar button) a previously copied state onto a corresponding state in the State Manager (for the page or popup page).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

205

Working With States

Pasting a state on the panel name in the Panel Navigator (which is for pages or popup pages only), on the folder named Pages (which is for pages only), on the folder named Popup Pages (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.

Draw Order (Z-Order)
Z-Order, or "Draw Order" refers to the order in which the various visual elements of a Page, Popup Page or Button are drawn on the screen. The element at the top of the Z-Order overlaps all other elements. The top of the Z-Order is like the top layer in a multi-layer drawing. The element at the bottom of the Z-Order is overlapped by all other elements. The bottom of the ZOrder is like the bottom layer in a multi-layer drawing. By default, the state draw order is:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

fill bitmap icon text border

You can change the draw order via the options in the State Draw Order dialog.

Changing the Draw Order for Selected States
Use the State Draw Order dialog to specify the draw order for selected states:

1. Select a button, page or popup page. 2. Click the Browse button (...) in the Draw Order State property to access the State Draw Order dialog
(FIG. 195).

FIG. 195 State Draw Order dialog

3. Select an element in the list, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the element up or
down in the list.

4. Repeat with the other elements in the list to rearrange the order as desired. 5. Click OK to close the dialog.
Note that the new draw order is indicated in the Draw Order state property.

206

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

Working With Function Codes
Overview
In terms of designing buttons that interact with and control the various devices on the control system, TPD4 uses a concept that is familiar to TPDesign3 users, but which has a new name in TPD4: Function Codes. Function Codes were known as Channel Codes and Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. In TPD4, the term Function Codes refers to all three of the code types that can be assigned to buttons: Channel Codes: Displayed in the upper-left corner of the button, the channel codes indicate the port number and the channel code associated with the button. The channel codes represent communication out of the panel to the master controller. Address Codes: Displayed in the lower-right corner of the button, address codes in TPD4 are similar to the Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. The address code represents communication from the master controller to the panel, causing the panel to do something (i.e. indicate feedback, display a text string, etc). Level Codes: Displayed in the lower-left corner of the button, level codes represent bi-directional communication between the panel and the master controller (i.e. the panel can cause a change in a level setting, and a changed level setting generates feedback on the panel). Each function code is a two-part number separated by a colon: Port Number:Channel/Address/Level Number (depending on which function code you are looking at). In the example below, the button function code assignments all indicate port 1 and channel/level/address 1 (FIG. 196).

FIG. 196 Button Function Code Assignments

The easiest way to handle function codes is to create and finalize your touch panel pages and buttons (with function codes) before generating the supporting Axcess or NetLinx program code. That way, in case you have to change any aspect of the project (i.e. add/remove controlled equipment, test strings, graphics, etc), you can update the function code assignments in TPD4, rather than having to re-write your code. There are several key differences in the way Function Codes work in TPD4 relative to the way they worked in TPDesign3: "Devices" in TPDesign3 are known as "Ports" in TPD4 (the maximum number of available ports in TPD4 is 100). Where there was a maximum number of 255 channel codes per device in TPDesign3, you can assign up to 4000 codes per port in TPD4. Unlike TPDesign3, TPD4 lets you to assign Address and Channel Codes directly to a page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

207

The maximum number of ports in TPD4 is 100. Alternatively. If Display Function Codes is enabled. The maximum number of level codes per port is 600. The maximum number of address codes per port is 4000. 197). 197 Function Code Map 208 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . FIG.Limitations The maximum number of channel codes per port is 4000. they will also be included in printed output. Function Codes .Working With Function Codes Show/Hide Function Codes You can choose to display function codes. press the F7 key to toggle the function codes. Function Code Map Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the Function Code Map (FIG. as well as the current state of buttons in the Design View window via the View > Display Function Codes option (or the toolbar button).

you cannot edit String or Command Outputs the same way. Setting the Address. In the event that an inappropriate code is selected for a given panel type. Address Codes. Channel Codes. Channel or Level port to the setup port provides a list of predefined actions. This list is sorted by Port. Selecting an item in the tree and then left clicking again will provide an in-place edit of the code value. Level codes. Neither String or Command Outputs support any type of drag and drop operations. TPDesign4 (v2. Level Codes).e. within the primary folder the selected item belongs to (i. Channel or Level port to the setup port ("0") provides a list of predefined actions. Therefore. 0. For example. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. and/or cradle). and fix any problems that are found. If codes have been assigned to any of the panel's sensors (light. You can use the Function Code Map to delete codes as well as drag and drop items from one port to another. and within Port by Code.Working With Function Codes The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. ensure that the codes selected apply to your particular panel type. they will now appear in the Function Map and can be modified there just like button function codes. While you can (in-place) edit the Channel. Select Panel > Verify Function Codes to automatically verify the active project's Function Code Map. that code will be ignored. Some of the actions may be hardware dependent. These can only be edited via the Programming tab of the Properties Control window. motion. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Navigator window. Address and Level codes via these folders.Setup Port Setting the Address. you cannot drag and drop an Address Code (regardless of the port folder that contains it) into any port folder contained in either the Channel or Level folders. A double-click action on the item will open the associated page (or popup page) and place the edit focus on that item.11 or higher) 209 . battery. Address codes.

Click Assign. and does not affect pages or popup pages. 198 Power Assign dialog One valuable use of this feature is to establish a contiguous range of channel / address codes on a set of buttons. select Channel. To accomplish this. 198). select Channel. Power Assign works only at the button level. they will show up as used when Power Assign does its' checks. Finally. and other properties that depend on button type. you need to understand the nuances of some of the options involved: 210 TPDesign4 (v2. Click Assign. Clear Channels First One powerful feature of Power Assign is the ability to clear the various function codes from the buttons. then: 1. Under Function Code Action. FIG. but usually you'll want to clear them before assigning. Under Function Code Action. all you need to do is bring up the Power Assign dialog. If you don't clear the codes first. 2. 3. by following the instructions below and utilizing the Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment options. Once you ensure that the desired button or buttons have been selected. left-click on the button in the set that should receive the first channel / address code. Under Function Code Type. 3. Select Button > Power Assign (or press F8) to open the Power Assign dialog (FIG. Under Function Code Type. Address or Level. this may be what you want to have happen. then by holding down the CTRL key.11 or higher) . The Power Assign feature can operate on a single button. select each of the remaining buttons in the set in the order in which you want the channel / address codes to be assigned. Use Power Assign to streamline this process.Working With Function Codes Using Power Assign One of the big time-eating factors of creating a touch panel file is correctly setting up the channel. and any of the buttons in the group you are assigning already have codes assigned. It is good practice to clear the function codes before any Assign Codes operations. select Clear. one can assign channel / address codes to every button in the set with significantly fewer mouse clicks and keystrokes than would otherwise be possible. In some cases. or on a group of selected buttons. 2. select Assign. Address or Level. To use take full advantage of Power Assign. Assign Codes Next assign new function codes: 1. address and level function codes for any given button.

and level codes (in addition to the currently displayed state) in the corners of the buttons. uncheck this option. and click Assign again. In either of these cases. the assign operation begins at the first available channel. Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) This is used when the channel codes have to be in order. Another thing that comes into play with being able to use multiple ports is that you may need to confine certain ranges of channel codes to a single port to take advantage of the DEFINE_MUTUALLY_EXCLUSIVE channel grouping in the code. One can also simply undo the action if desired. which ensures that all channel codes assigned fall within a single port. or Level) code. Since the selection is retained after any operation. 2. Check Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment. However. You can visually verify that the desired action was accomplished by ensuring that the Display Function & State Overlay option is selected from the View menu. Since MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE works on a particular port. Address. one must ensure that the group of buttons is entirely within a single port. since the order is important. Look for a clear range of channel and address codes large enough. If you don't care what channels are assigned. if you make a mistake.Working With Function Codes Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) When Begin Assignment At is selected (in the Power Assign dialog) you can specify the starting value of the Port and Function (Channel. make sure to create the selection using CTRL-Select. If you don't check the Begin Assignment At option. Then supply the port and channel code values. and click Assign. In these cases. Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign) Since touch panels support more than one port. an immense amount of power is available in the options within the floating Power Assign dialog. things like SYSTEM_CALLS are based upon all the channels coming from a single device (port). The Begin Assignment At function is particularly useful for setting up things like numeric keypads. and TPD4 will find the next available free channels. In this case the values will be subject to whether or not you've set the Begin Assignment At checkbox. it's easy to click Clear Codes and hit the assign button again. where you need the channel codes to begin at a specific value. you're not limited to 256 channel and address codes. If the channels are split across ports. use CTRL-select to select the buttons in the order you want to assign the channels. click Address under Function Code Type.11 or higher) 211 . click Channel under Function Code Type. Here's the setup you would use: 1. Remember that Power Assign processes the function code assignments based on the order in the selection so. open the Power Assign dialog. and make a note of the start channel. TPDesign4 (v2. One nice thing about the Power Assign palette is that it retains its settings after use. skipping used channels and continuing on until all available channels have been assigned. First. with no breaks between them. use the Functions tab of the Workspace Navigator and click back and forth between the channel and address options. address. check the Wrap Within Port ID option. just like the standard Auto Assign. as in a numeric keypad. since you might be using offset math in your code to process the button pushes. which is handy when you need both the channel and address codes to have the same numeric values. While initially somewhat confusing. 3. This will visually display the channel. Next. Next. if the order is important to you. the feedback part of the System Call won't work.

11 or higher) .Working With Function Codes 212 TPDesign4 (v2.

or by dragging the cursor around the palette. transparencies (popup pages and buttons). RGB Color: a full-feature RGB palette that allows you specify RGB (plus Hue. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors (FIG. TPD4 supports the importing of either a JASC® formatted palette file. and text (pages. then click More Colors. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. Color assignments are made through the Colors dialog. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. In most cases. 199 Colors dialog . Palettes are saved as part of the panel file. There are several ways to open the Colors dialog: When setting new button parameters. a Microsoft® formatted palette file. and buttons). or a custom palette file previously saved from within the application. popup page or button. popup pages and buttons). FIG. Additionally. Blue and Green) values. TPD4 also allows you to save or load custom palettes. popup pages. 199).11 or higher) 213 . Saturation. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Saturation. Click to select an existing page. which allows you to specify RGB (Red. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. plus Hue. and click on Fill Color in the States tab of the Properties Control Window. Fill Color or Text Color toolbar icons to open the base palette. Brightness and Opacity) values numerically. click on the Border Color. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors that can be applied to fills (pages.Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors A key feature of TPD4 is it's ability to utilize the full 32-bit RGB color palette. Every color element that is not assigned either directly via an RGBA selection or the named color table will reference this palette and be affected by any changes made to it. Brightness and Opacity.RGB Color TPDesign4 (v2. The Colors dialog supports three ways to select colors from the RGB color palette: 1.

Color Name 214 TPDesign4 (v2. 201 Colors dialog . 201). These Base 88 colors are identical to those provided in previous versions of TPDesign3.Palette Index 3. 200 Colors dialog . 200). Palette Index: a default palette that provides the Base 88 colors (which the can be modified if desired). FIG. FIG. and include the transparent color in position 255 (FIG.Working With Colors and Palettes 2. The Palette Index offers a maximum of 255 colors (FIG.11 or higher) . Color Name: a named color selection dialog based on the Base 88 color scheme.

the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). 202). Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create custom palettes and save them as *. without having to edit the buttons directly. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create and save custom palettes.11 or higher) 215 . so once imported.PAL files. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project.PAL files that can then be imported/exported for use in other projects. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Working With Multiple Color Palettes TPDesign4 supports multiple color palettes to allow easy switching between color schemes. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette. and named palette entries. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . Creating New Palette Entries 1. which can then be imported/exported for use in other TPD4 projects. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Custom Palettes can be saved as *.Working With Colors and Palettes Neither JASC nor Microsoft palette files support transparency in the same manner that TPD4 utilizes transparency. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder). FIG. custom palettes cannot be reopened in another graphics package. For example. 202 Edit Palettes dialog TPDesign4 (v2.one color scheme for each season. Working With Palettes TPD4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. this can cause color shifting on the button.

By default. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. Red/Blue/Green.11 or higher) . Select a palette entry: To add a new palette entry to the palette. 5. By default. 4. Enter the new name for this palette in the text field and select OK. Select the palette that you want to add a new palette entry (color) to. 3. 6. 3. Renaming Palettes 1. This is optional. opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. Each color that is listed in the palette is considered to be a palette entry. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG.Working With Colors and Palettes By default. 202 on page 215). 2. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. Repeat steps 3 . To add palette entries (colors) to this palette. By default. 3. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. To edit an existing palette entry. 6. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color and color name (if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. Click the New button to clear the palette index of all entries. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. Red/Blue/Green. Creating Custom Palettes 1. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. select a slot with no color assignment. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of this dialog). 203 on page 216). 2. 2. in the upper-left corner of this dialog. as indicated in the palette selection drop-down list in the upper-left corner of this dialog. select an existing color. Click the Rename button to open the Rename dialog (FIG. in the palette selection drop-down list. Use the cursor in the Color Value chart. use the cursor in the Color Value chart. the new palette is titled Unnamed. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color (and color name if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette.5 to add as many additional colors to this palette as needed. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. 4. and each palette entry is represented by an index number (1-256). 5. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. This is optional. 202 on page 215). opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. Select the palette that you want to rename from the palette selection drop-down list. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. The index numbers correlate to the slot in the palette that this color occupies. FIG. 203 Rename dialog 4. 216 TPDesign4 (v2.

202 on page 215). 3. Select the slot that you want to paste the copied palette entry into and click Paste Entry. Use this feature to save and distribute custom palettes that can be imported back into TPD4 via the Import option: 1. 202 on page 215). 3. TPDesign4 (v2.PAL file. Use this dialog to locate and select the desired *. 4.Working With Colors and Palettes 5. If you select a slot that already has a palette entry. Click the New button to open a new (empty palette) or select an existing one from the drop-down list. 6. Click to select the palette entry that you want to copy. Note that the new name overwrites the previous name (removing the previous name from the list). 202 on page 215). the copied color will overwrite the original. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 2. in the upper-left corner of the dialog. Changing the Active Palette To select a different palette to use. 5. 3. and select from the listing of available palettes in the palette selection drop-down list. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. as a *. Click Open to import the selected palette file and close the Open dialog. Copying Palettes Use the Copy and Paste buttons at the top of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste entire palettes: 1. Exporting Palette Files You can export palette (*. Click the Export button to access the Save As dialog. Select the palette that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). Click the Paste button to paste the contents of the source palette into the new (target) palette. If you desire to make the imported palette the active palette. Copying Palette Entries Use the Copy Entry and Paste Entry buttons at the bottom of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste individual palette entries (colors): 1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 2. you must select the Set Active button at the top of the dialog.11 or higher) 217 .PAL) files for use in your project via the Import option in the Edit Palettes dialog: 1. you could open an existing palette and paste over the existing palette entries. Select the palette that contains the color(s) that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). Click the Import button to access the Open dialog. 2. 202 on page 215). Use this dialog to save the palette to a specified directory. Importing Palette Files You can import palette (*. 202 on page 215). 4. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Alternatively. 2. 4. Click the Copy Entry button. select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to access the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG.PAL) files for use in other projects via the Export option in the Edit Palettes dialog. The new name of the palette is indicated in the palette selection drop-down list.PAL file. Click the Copy button.

and saved as part of the TPD4 project.Working With Colors and Palettes Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder TPDesign4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. These preview images are used to display the color schemes that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. While it is not an enforced requirement. the buttons in the project must use the border types that come with TPD4 (as opposed to a custom image that defines the button's look). the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template.TPT). Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. TPDesign4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. You can also use Chameleon Images in conjunction with custom palettes to further enhance the use of Color schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application.11 or higher) . Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. 218 TPDesign4 (v2. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements.one color scheme for each design. Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program Select Tools > Paint to launch the Microsoft Paint Utility program. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder). the Color Schemes feature is applied via the Project menu in G4 PanelBuilder. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . in order for the project to actually make use of multiple palettes in G4 PanelBuilder. Using custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPDesign4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Custom palettes are created in TPDesign4. In order to utilize Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. Refer to the Paint online help for instructions on using Microsoft® Paint. without having to edit the buttons directly. the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. For example. However.

In the Properties Control window . The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. popup page or button. Streaming Source is available as a video fill option. without having to create a page-size button (as was the case in TPDesign3). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. The NXP-TPI/4 and TPI-PRO accommodate up to four video source inputs. and NXD/NXT-1700VG only). 3. be sure to click on the page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Page. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream in the Streaming Source field. and not a button on the page. you can assign a "video fill" to a page. 2. 204). TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodate up to 4 video source inputs. The NXP-TPI/4. Streaming Video Fills If the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video (NXD/NXT-1200VG. If Streaming Source is selected from the drop-down list of Video Fill options (in the States tab of the Properties Window). NXD/NXT-1500VG. Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. then Streaming Source is added to the list of state properties. TPDesign4 (v2. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. Select (or a create) a Page in your project. 204 State Properties: Video Fill options If you are working with an existing page with buttons.States Tab. TPD4 supports video fills directly to the page/popup page. Popup Page or Button. FIG. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources.Working With Video Fills Working With Video Fills Overview If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel.11 or higher) 219 . and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill.

be sure to click on the popup page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Popup Page. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. 3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Popup Page. use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). In the Properties Control window . click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4). 2. and not a button on the Popup Page. Since this is a state-oriented setting. 2.Working With Video Fills Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page.States Tab. If you are working with an existing Popup Page with buttons. 220 TPDesign4 (v2. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4).11 or higher) . Popup Page or Button. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. To apply the video fill across all states. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. In the Properties Control window . To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. Popup Page or Button. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window.States Tab. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. Alternatively. Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. 3. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill.

11 or higher) 221 .Working With Video Fills TPDesign4 (v2.

Working With Video Fills 222 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

through the File > Import Resources option.. don't mix "1" and "01" or "001"). You can create an animation sequence for a multi-state button manually. Select Button > Animation Wizard to start the wizard. etc. This however. cool_button_spin04. and set the sequence of the images.. Multi-state buttons can have up to 256 states. all of which are available to be used as "frames" in an animation. Also. by creating a series of states and applying a different bitmap or icon to each state and treating each state as an individual frame. It guides you through the steps of generating an animation sequence that can be applied to a multi-state button to apply impressive visual effects to your buttons. they will be available via this drop-down list. Once you import a series of images with identical names except for a post-fixed numeric indicator. TPDesign4 (v2. Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. and there are no other options in this dropdown list until at least one sequence has been created.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. cool_button_spin01. Animation Wizard . and set the sequence of the images.11 or higher) 223 . Ctrl+click to select multiple files. 2. click the Add button.jpg. Select Chameleon Image to use (32-bit PNG) chameleon images in the animation.). it makes things easier if you take naming into consideration before importing the files. The Animation Wizard automates most of the process and makes the task easy. or Shift+click to select the range of files between two selections. In order for images to appear in the Sequence drop down for selection.e.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. Note: If you select a General (two-state) button to use with the animation wizard. where you can select which images to include in the animation. the wizard will allow you to add the necessary number of states to the button to accommodate the animation sequence (and automatically change the button type to Multi-State General). This opens the Select Resource dialog. Although you can edit the sequence of the images in the animation manually. cool_button_spin03. make sure the numbering convention used for the files is consistent (i. Animation Wizard . cool_button_spin02. the images that you use to create the animation must be named in sequence (i.e. would be a very tedious and time-intensive process. The Sequence selection is set to "[custom]" by default. This opens the first of six dialogs: Animation Wizard . Select Bitmap to use bitmaps in the animation.Select Type (Step 1 of 6).Working With Animation Effects Working With Animation Effects Overview TPD4 utilizes three main concepts for supporting animation effects in your projects: Animation Wizard Tweening Chameleon Images Using the Animation Wizard The Animation Wizard is a powerful tool included with TPD4. Select Icon to use icons in the animation.jpg. To create a simple button animation using the Animation Wizard: 1.jpg. or via the Import button on the Resource Manager dialog (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54 for details). To add the images that will comprise the animation sequence.jpg. Note that the only images that are available to choose from are those that have been imported into the project. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard .Select Type (Step 1 of 6) Use the radio buttons in this dialog to specify the type of animation to create (Bitmap or Icon).

If the images were named consecutively. 224 TPDesign4 (v2. Animation Wizard .Appearance (Step 5 of 6) dialog. Note that since TPD4 does not support the (proprietary) . there are also many freeware applications available). Use the first field to indicate which state to start the animation on (default = 1.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) dialog. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Use the Add and Remove buttons to add/remove selected images from the sequence (if necessary). Use the Move Left and Move Right buttons to re-arrange the image sequence (if necessary). Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard .Working With Animation Effects You can bring existing animated GIF files into your project via a third-party application (for example JASC® 's Animation Shop which comes bundles with Paint Shop Pro . Use the radio buttons in the top-half of the dialog to specify wether to scale the button to fit the animated image. Lets say that your sequence has ten frames. a warning message is displayed along the bottom of the dialog. If you are applying an animation that is bigger than the containing button. If you select Absolute. use the radio buttons to indicate how to handle them (Leave Alone or Remove). Select the desired position option from the drop-down list. Animation Wizard . Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . if more states are required for the animation. So. Use the next field to indicate which of the existing states to duplicate. Use the options in the lower-half of this dialog to specify the positioning of the animated image relative to the button containing it. Obviously. The image files you selected now appear in alpha-numeric order in the preview window of this dialog. Once extracted. and the size of the button that will contain it. and the number of states available on the button to which the animation is to be applied.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) dialog.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the size and position of the animation relative to the button that will contain it.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. Click OK in the Select Resource dialog to return to the Animation Wizard .GIF file type.11 or higher) . if you create a multi-state button. the first state). The general concept is that you start with an existing animated GIF image. you have only two states on the button. and the animated image will be clipped (cropped) to fit in the button. you'll have to add at least eight states to the button (one frame per button state). Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . For example. and save each frame in the animation out as an individual image file (resulting in a series of image files). This dialog tells you two important pieces of information: the size of the animated image. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. If button states exist beyond the end of the animation. the animation sequence will have more than two frames. and open the Animation Wizard before adding any states.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) Use this dialog to create enough states to accommodate the number of frames in the animation sequence. 0. 5. 4.version 7 or higher. you shouldn't have to modify the sequence at all. for a ten-frame animation. these files can be imported into your TPD4 project. you will have to save the frames out to a supported file type. and the original GIF animation can be simulated. use the X and Y fields to indicate the desired position. The options in this dialog allow you to automatically detect the number of frames in the animation sequence. or to simply apply the animation to the button at its current size. 3.

these options default to leave both border an fill color alone (Leave alone). including: The number of states to be added to the button. If creating a bitmap animation.Appearance (Step 5 of 6) Use this dialog to specify how treat the Button Border Style. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). Remember. you might say that you have 256 frames available for the animation. Tweening is a common concept in all sorts of animation software. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. to make a button fade completely in/out on a page.Working With Animation Effects Animation Wizard . TPDesign4 (v2. these options default to no border (Set to "none") and transparent fill (Set to "transparent"). and click Push). This is called "Animate Time Up". Animation Wizard . Provided you are not creating an image-based animation. So. If creating a icon animation. "tweening" is the process of altering the display properties of intermediate frames between two images to give the appearance that the first image evolves smoothly into the second image. and Button Fill Color on the resulting button. which can have up to 256 states which are used to animate a button push from Off to On and back again to Off. the states will be displayed in reverse order. The starting state for the animation. The position of the animation on the button. the tweening process greatly simplifies the process of generating each state individually by automatically creating a gradual transition across all states based on the state properties of the first and last states.Finish (Step 6 of 6) dialog. TPD4 supports multi-state buttons. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. Note that the animation is indicated in the State Manager window. In TPD4. you would have to create the button without borders. Beyond simplifying the process of creating motion animations.Finish (Step 6 of 6) This dialog lists the actions to be taken to generate the button animation. and which state to duplicate. if you create a multi-state button with 256 states. Use the Button Preview window to view the animation (select View > Button Preview. many other animation effects can be achieved via the Tweening tools of TPD4. the number of frames in the animation. tweening also generates very smooth color transition effects that would be difficult or impossible to do any other way. Click Finish to generate the animation. Tweening Short for in-betweening. A listing of each state and the image file associated with it. and is definable in 1/10th second increments. also definable in 1/10th second increments.11 or higher) 225 . Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . When the button is turned back Off. Since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. 6. each state of a multi-state button can be thought of as an individual frame. and the animation type (Bitmap or Icon). When the multi-state button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. This is called "Animate Time Down".

Text Color. The color tweener(s) will generate a transition effect that fades the first color into the second (FIG. To create a color transition effect: The following steps apply to all three button color attributes (Border Color. An opacity setting of 255 (max) makes the button totally opaque. Border Color. you would have to create the button without a border assignment. Note that the more states you use. FIG. This is called "Animate Time Up". but change the opacity on one of them to zero (via the Colors dialog. When the button is turned back Off. However. Fill Color. since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. and is definable in 1/10th second increments. the states will be displayed in reverse order. set to RGB colors). An opacity setting of zero makes the button totally transparent. 207). This is called "Animate Time Down". With 256 states available to use as "frames" in a tweened animation. When the button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. most color transition effects don't require that many frames to produce a very smooth fade. 206). Fill Color and Text Color tweeners to easily apply color transition effects to multi-state buttons. Apply a color (Fill Color. 205 Multi-State Button (4 States) 2. leave the colors the same for the first and last states. these effects can be made to be very subtle and smooth. Text Color and Text Effect Color): 1. Text Effect Color or any combination) to the last state that is different from that of the first state (FIG. or in combinations to create smooth fades from one color to another when the button is pressed. Note that to make buttons fade in/out completely. 226 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. Ctrl+click to select two states in the State Manager window that are separated by at least one state (do not select the intermediate states). When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting).Working With Animation Effects Creating Color Transition Effects Use the Border Color. 3. 205). The color tweeners can be used individually. the smoother the transitions will appear. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. also definable in 1/10th second increments. Select (or create a new) multi-state button with at least three states (FIG. FIG. 206 Multi-State Button (4 States) To create a fade effect.

To create animated bitmap effects with an icon: 1. 208 Multi-State Button (4 States) Use the All Colors Tweener to tween all colors applied to the button. TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. Move the icon into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). 7. and with different combinations of tweeners.States tab). However. 208). the TPD4 tweening tools are not limited to one tween effect per multi-stage button press.11 or higher) 227 . and select Tweeners from the context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. 5. The Bitmap Position tweener allows you to cause a bitmap to move around the button area when it is pressed. 5. place the icon in its end position in the animation via the Image/ Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). They must be separated by at least one stage. Set the Icon Justification property to Absolute. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the icon start and end positions in the State Manager window. Right-click on one of the highlighted states in the State Manager window. The results are displayed immediately in the State Manager window (FIG. and you should not select the intermediate states). Experiment with applying multiple color tweens to the same button. 2. 3. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). Select (or create a new) multi-state button. Add an icon to the button (via the Icon field in the Properties Control window . In the last state included in the tween. Creating Animated Bitmap Effects Use the Icon Position and Bitmap Position tweeners to apply animated bitmap effects to multi-state buttons. 8. 6. 4. 4. Select one or more of the color tweeners to apply effects.Working With Animation Effects FIG. Duplicate the state that the tweening should begin across all states to be included in the tween. The Icon Position tweener allows you to cause an icon to move around the button area when it is pressed. Animated bitmap effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eyecatching visual effects. 207 Multi-State Button (4 States) The most basic type of color transition effect starts at the first state (or frame) and ends at the last.

Icon. and Text positions applied to two selected button states all at once. bitmap or text. and Text Effect colors between two selected states all at once. follow the steps outlined above. They must be separated by at least one stage. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. The options in this menu include: Border Color . Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the text start and end positions in the State Manager window. the justification for the icon. the justification for the icon. Overall Opacity . bitmap or text.This option tweens the position of a bitmap applied to two selected button states. some of these options may not be available. The only difference is that you will select and apply a bitmap rather than an icon to the button. Add text to the button (via the Text field in the Properties Control window . All Colors . Note that depending on the elements of the selected buttons. Text. All Positions .This option tweens the Border.11 or higher) . 7. Move the text into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). Copy the text from the first state to the last state to be tweened. For example. 228 TPDesign4 (v2.This option will tween the Bitmap. 5. Text Color . Set the Text Justification property to Absolute. and move it to its end position in the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). Icon Position .This option tweens the Fill color (only) between two selected button states.This option tweens the Text color (only) between two selected button states. Fill. In order to apply motion tweening to an icon. Select (or create a new) multi-state button. To create animated text effects: 1.This option tweens the Text Effect Color (only) between two selected button states. Fill Color . 3. The Text Position tweener will generate a motion effect that moves the text across the button. Creating Animated Text Effects Use the Text Position tweener to apply animated text effects to multi-state buttons.States tab). and you should not select the intermediate states). In order to apply tweening to an icon.This option tweens the Overall Opacity (only) between two selected button states.This option tweens the Border color (only) between two selected button states. This menu allows you to select a type of tweener to use in creating animations on multi-state buttons. 2. Animated text effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eye-catching visual effects.Working With Animation Effects To create animated bitmap effects with a bitmap image. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). Text Position . Tweeners sub-menu Select Tweeners from the States Menu or the State Manager context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu.This option tweens the position of text applied to two selected button states. 6.This option tweens the position of an icon applied to two selected button states. The text position tweener allows you to have the button text move around the button area when it is pressed. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. the Bitmap Position option is only available if the selected buttons use a bitmap. 4. Text Effect Color . Bitmap Position .

As a result. The Green channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Border Color. Red. A chameleon image is a PNG image file that. chameleon images can also take advantage of TPD4's tweening tools to easily create color transition effects. they enable the ability to create multiple color schemes that can be applied to a single template in the G4 PanelBuilder application.This option tweens the size of text applied to two selected button states. The Chameleon Image state property is available for all button types except Text Input. uses the Fill and Border colors assigned to the button/state to determine the colors in the image. When creating an image to be used as a Chameleon image in TPD4. Chameleon Images TPD4 supports a button state property called Chameleon Image. the Border Name state property must be set to none. The basic requirements that allow an image file to be recognized as a chameleon image in TPD4 are: It is a PNG image file It uses RGB color (8 bits/channel) It has an alpha channel defined In order for a chameleon image to be applied to buttons or popup pages. Green and Blue). The Blue channel is not used. when placed on top (via the Draw Order state property). then the Chameleon Image property becomes available. the image to be used is one that either was created or was selected specifically with the concept of colorizable regions that could be changed to suit different design needs. if the Fill and/or Border colors are changed. To access AMX Tech Notes.com as a dealer. when applied to a button/state. some images make more sense and would give better results than others. glow and drop-shadow effects. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder help topic for details. you must be logged into www. Furthermore. One possible benefit of using chameleon images is that. Computer Control and TakeNote buttons. Ideally.amx. TPDesign4 (v2. Refer to the Chameleon Images. can add highlighting and shadow effects to convincingly create an illusion of depth.Working With Animation Effects Text Size . The Red channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Fill Color. Requirements for Chameleon Images Chameleon images can be applied to buttons to create animated highlighting. The position-oriented tweener options only work when the selected elements are set to use absolute positioning. When the border name is set to none. This file can be viewed in G4 PanelPreview or on an actual G4 panel. then the colors used in the chameleon image will change accordingly. In other words. while virtually any PNG file could be applied as a chameleon image. set the image properties to RGB Color and 8 Bits/Channel. When used with multi-state buttons. chameleon images may also use a companion bitmap which. For an example of a chameleon image.11 or higher) 229 . refer to the "Chameleon Demo" TPD4 file attached to Tech Note TN733 to provide an example of chameleon images. PNG images consist of four separate color channels (Alpha. and chameleon images use the button/state's Fill and Border color assignments to determine the colors used in the image as follows: The Alpha channel of the Chameleon image defines the overall shape mask for the state. Note that chameleon images are not necessarily different from any other PNG image file. it is an image that can have its colors changed on the panel itself (at runtime). when used in conjunction with custom palettes. That is.

3. It has been applied to a button as the Chameleon Image (via the Chameleon Image state property). FIG. 209 Working With Chameleon Images Working With Chameleon Images .11 or higher) . When creating an image to be used as a chameleon image. 2. Use the alpha channel to define the overall desired shape of the button (see Working with Transparent Backgrounds for more information). Working With Chameleon Images Chameleon Images utilize the 4 color channels (Red.Example Here's an example of creating a simple chameleon image. keep in mind that the Red and Green color channels will be replaced by the colors specified as the Fill and Border colors in TPD4 for each state of the button. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. The Blue color channel is not used for chameleon buttons. Blue. 230 TPDesign4 (v2. Export the image as a PNG file. Keep in mind that the Chameleon Image state property is not available for Text Input. Import the image file into TPD4 (via the Import button on the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog). only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. 2. for the purpose of illustrating the basic concepts used: 1. 4.Working With Animation Effects The characteristics that define any image as a chameleon image are: 1. 209). The exported file must be a 32-bit RGB Color (8 Bits/Channel) file in order to be interpreted correctly by TPD4 as a chameleon image. create or select a button to which you wish to apply the chameleon image. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors (32-bit). In a Design View window. since in TPD4. Computer Control or TakeNote button types. Green and Alpha) that comprise 32-bit images to define separate colorizable regions (FIG. It meets the technical requirements for a chameleon image. Using an image editing program to create an image to use as the chameleon image: Only PNG image files can be used as chameleon images.

set the button's Border Name to None. 210 Chameleon Image . In the Chameleon Image property. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must utilize at least one chameleon image (meaning that a chameleon image has been applied to at least one button in the project).Fill and Border colors Since chameleon buttons rely on the Border and Fill color settings.11 or higher) 231 . There are also several requirements for images to allow them to be recognized as chameleon images by TPD4. click the browse button (. However. Chameleon Images. In order to utilize Chameleon Images and Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder.Fill and Border colors tweened In fact. 211 Chameleon Image . note that any portion of the image that exists on the Red color channel now matches the color specified in the Fill Color state property. and saved as part of the TPD4 project.. Since the Fill and Border colors are in turn associated with a particular color palette (which is saved as part of the TPD4 project). Using chameleon images coupled with custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPD4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Chameleon images are imported and applied to buttons (or popup pages) in TPD4. 6. the primary benefits of these features are realized in the G4 PanelBuilder application (via the Project > Color Schemes feature). TPDesign4 (v2. Now that the image has been applied as a chameleon image. Similarly.one color scheme for each design. Chameleon images utilize the 4 color channels that comprise 32-bit PNG images to define separate colorizable regions.Working With Animation Effects 5.) to access the Resource Manager dialog. The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). In the States tab of the Properties Window. Custom palettes are created in TPD4. Text) make up your button. A few examples of color changes resulting from changing the Fill and Border colors for the button/state with the chameleon image (FIG. any portion of the image that exists on the Green color channel now matches the color specified in the Border Color state property. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder Chameleon images can be used in conjunction with custom palettes to create G4 PanelBuilder template files that. the Chameleon Image property becomes available (directly beneath Border Name). TPD4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. are capable of switching from one color scheme to another without having to edit the buttons directly. The Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder allow you to apply different "color skins" to a single template. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . For example.. Icons. Select the chameleon image (in the Image tab) and click OK to apply it to the selected button.TPT). 211): FIG. Note that at this point. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. 210): FIG. when opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. depending on what elements (Bitmaps. the Chameleon images can by used in conjunction with any of the other Tweening tools. you can use the Fill Color and Border Color Tweening tools to quickly create color transition effects for each of the color channels (FIG. the colors used to render the chameleon image will change if and when a different color palette is applied to the template in the G4 PanelBuilder application.

11 or higher) . the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements.Working With Animation Effects The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. 232 TPDesign4 (v2. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template. These preview images are used to display the color options that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application.

you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect (FIG. There are three types of file transfer operations in TPD4 (both accessible via the Transfer menu): Send To Panel: Sends the currently open project (*. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2.11 or higher) 233 . the files themselves are routed to the panels. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. 212). or select an existing configuration from the drop-down list and click Properties to edit those saved settings. Secure NetLinx Connections If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. where they will reside (touch panel files never reside on the Master). Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Masters that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. You'll have to be aware of the security settings on the target Master before trying to connect. and select New to create a new communication configuration. You can save the User Name/Password combination as part of the communication configuration for that Master. Once they are entered here. all file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. 2. To access the Connection Settings dialog. select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. Receive From Panel: Receives a project file from a Master.File Transfer Operations File Transfer Operations Overview In TPD4. you must enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. While all file transfer operations to touch panels are managed by the Master. Send File To Panel: Sends a selected project file to a specified Master. 1. 3. 212 Connection Settings dialog (Authentication enabled) TPDesign4 (v2. without opening the file in TPD4. via the User Name and Password fields in the Connection Settings dialog. FIG.TP4) file to a specified Master. 4. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields.

File Transfer Operations When attempting to connect to a secured NetLinx Master. they will be ignored. so it does not need to be established/ dropped each time a transfer is performed.Connection drop-down list 234 TPDesign4 (v2. The configuration you specify under that name can then be accessed via the Connection drop-down list in the Connect dialog. The status bar reflects the status of the connection as follows (FIG. If a User Name/Password is specified for a Master that does not require authentication. FIG. To recall a saved communication configuration. the connection will fail and TPD4 will display an error message indicating why the connection was denied. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings (FIG. 214).11 or higher) . See the Connecting to a NetLinx Master section on page 235 for details on establishing a new connection. the program requires you to enter a name for the configuration (in the Name field of the Connection Settings dialog). FIG. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. if the correct User Name/Password combination is not entered (or if the entries are incorrect). 215). 213): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. and select the desired configuration from the Connection drop-down list (FIG. 214 Connect dialog Anytime you establish a new communication connection configuration (via the New button in the Connect dialog). 213 Connection Status (indicated in the Status Bar) Working With Communications Configurations Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations Connection information is maintained separate from the transfer itself. 215 Connect dialog .

TCP/IP selected as Transport 5. Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration 1. as opposed to connecting directly to the panels. Once these steps have been completed. In the Connect dialog. you will first establish communication between the PC running TPD4 and the NetLinx Master to which the target panels are connected. FIG. Connecting to a NetLinx Master Typically. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. without having to re-configure. There are three possible ways to connect to a NetLinx Master: TCP/IP. The Connect dialog allows you to set up communications. Do not change this number. file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the panels are connected.File Transfer Operations To delete a saved configuration. TPDesign4 (v2. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). 7. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog.11 or higher) 235 . click New to establish a new connection. 1. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP These steps describe establishing TCP/IP communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. select a configuration (in the Connect dialog) and click the Delete button. 6. Select Transfer > Connect to access this dialog. and save multiple connection configurations for easy access. Select the configuration that you want to edit from the Connection drop-down list. 4. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. 2. 2. 3. Serial or Modem. Click the Edit button to invoke the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. 4. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. 216). Enter the IP Address of the target NetLinx Master in the IP Address/DNS Name field. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). Select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. Therefore. in order to transfer touch panel files for use on G4compatible panels. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. 212 on page 233). In the Connection Settings dialog. 212 on page 233). 3. 216 Connection Settings dialog . and click OK to save your changes and return to the Connect dialog. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. Edit the communication settings for the selected configuration as needed.

click New to establish a new connection. Parity. 217).3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. 212 on page 233).3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 3. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. 7. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. In the Connection Settings dialog. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port These steps describe establishing serial communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. 6. 8. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). In the Connect dialog. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. 236 TPDesign4 (v2. Stop Bits and Flow control) as needed. Once these steps have been completed. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. Once they are entered here. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. 1. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Baud Rate. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Data Bits. 2. Once they are entered here. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. 217 Connection Settings dialog . 9. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. without having to re-configure. FIG.File Transfer Operations Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. 8.11 or higher) . Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. 4. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection.Serial selected as Transport 5.

Once they are entered here. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2.File Transfer Operations Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem These steps describe establishing modem communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Stop Bits. 5. Data Bits. 212 on page 233).Modem selected as Transport 4. Baud Rate. In the Connect dialog. 3. 218 Connection Settings dialog . 2. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Once these steps have been completed. FIG. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. 1. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. Flow control and Phone #) as needed. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. In the Connection Settings dialog. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Parity. 218). click New to establish a new connection.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. TPDesign4 (v2. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. 6. without having to re-configure. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog.11 or higher) 237 . 7. Press the Connect button to establish the connection.

file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. enter a name for this communication configuration. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list. e. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed.File Transfer Operations Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master Select Transfer > Send To Panel (or Transfer > Send File To Panel) to send a panel file to a NetLinx Master with a G4-compatible panel (or panels) on its bus. To transfer to a G4 panel. via the Connect dialog. In TPD4. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. the panel files are routed to the panels. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. Earlier versions of the firmware and TPD4 software are incompatible with G4 panels. Do not change this number. Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master Use the Transfer > Receive From Panel option (or click the toolbar button) to connect to a Master and upload a panel file from a compatible G4 touch panel on that Master's bus. Serial and Modem. In TPD4. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a.01 or higher. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. There are three ways to connect and upload Panel files: TCP/IP. Verify the TPD4 program being used is Version 1. the panel files are routed to the panels. 238 TPDesign4 (v2. select it from the dropdown list. To use TCP/IP as the transport type: 1. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. the Connect dialog is invoked (FIG. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. Serial and Modem. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. If you are not already connected to the Master. In the Name field. 214 on page 234). you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. Configure the TCP/IP connection (IP Address/DNS Name of the target/source device). In order to transfer touch panel files. c. Use the Send File To Panel option to send a project file without having to open it in TPD4. This is the name that will b. the panel files are routed to the panels. d. In order to transfer touch panel files. If you have already established a TCP/IP communication configuration. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Otherwise. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the TCP/IP connection. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. via the Connect dialog. verify that the NetLinx Master Firmware is build 85 or later. There are three transport types available to transfer touch panel files: TCP/IP.11 or higher) . Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP In TPD4. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels.

Otherwise. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. displaying an online device tree.1 Flow Control . enter a name for this communication configuration. Stop Bits and Flow Control). The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. If you encounter a transfer error.8 Parity . If you have already established a serial communication configuration.none These settings must match those of the selected COM port. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . the panel files are routed to the panels. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). Once communication is established. 3. See the Transfer Options section on page 241. In the Name field.11 or higher) 239 . Panel File Transfers via Serial Port In TPD4. b. Description. Data Bits.File Transfer Operations 3. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list. d. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. verify the IP Address. c. Parity. To use Serial as the transport type: 1. Panel ID. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). and connection status of both NetLinx Master and Modero panel. 4. If you are not already connected to the Master. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. and Manufacturer. Once communication is established.38400 Data Bits . 5. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). (firmware) Version. Device #. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. Configure the selected serial (COM port) connection (Baud Rate. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the serial connection. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. the Connect dialog is invoked. select it from the drop-down list. displaying an online device tree.none Stop Bits . Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting).

If you have already established a modem communication configuration.11 or higher) .1 Flow Control .8 Parity . Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. displaying an online device tree. (firmware) Version. This method can range in speed but on average communicates at 3 Kbps. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the modem connection. and Manufacturer. create and save a modem communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. 5.38400 Data Bits . Otherwise. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. 4. b. In the Name field. Configure the selected modem connection (Baud Rate. Once communication is established. If you are not already connected to the Master.none These settings must match those of the Modem. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. Panel File Transfers via Modem In TPD4.none Stop Bits . Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. Note: Modem transfer is the slowest method of transferring TPD4 panel files to the target device.File Transfer Operations The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. 3. Device #. Stop Bits. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list. Description. the panel files are routed to the panels. To use Modem as the transport type: 1. c. the Connect dialog is invoked. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. and Manufacturer. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). enter a name for this communication configuration. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. Device #. d. Parity. Description. Data Bits. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. (firmware) Version. 240 TPDesign4 (v2. select it from the dropdown list. Flow Control and Phone Number). See the Transfer Options section on page 241. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate .

4. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 2. 5. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. which reduces the transfer time by only replacing those panel files that have been updated (relative to the files already loaded in the panel). Normal transfer (all panel files): This option sends all panel files. Select Ethernet as the Master Connection. 3. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer Transfer Options Smart transfer (updated panel files only): Select to utilize the Smart Transfer feature. since it involves sending many more files. 2. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. 7. Open received panel (uploads only): Select this option to automatically open the panel file once it is received. 5.File Transfer Operations 4. or in your panel file on your PC (for uploads) are not included in the transfer. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via TCP/IP. 8. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. TPDesign4 (v2. you can use your PC's Ethernet connection to connect directly to the panel. sound files and fonts that all already resident on the target panel. and is not necessary in most cases. The Full Clean option adds considerable time to the transfer. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). Full clean transfer (all panel & system graphic files): Select this option to automatically wipe out any existing project files resident in the target panel before loading the new panel file. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. Select the Master URL / IP input box and enter the IP address of your PC (displayed in the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog). Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 3. you don't need to use the Full Clean option. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. Clear from status queue when complete: This option (enabled by default) clears each transfer from the Transfer Status Window when complete. press and hold the Setup Access button (on the front panel.11 or higher) 241 . In this situation. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via TCP/IP: 1. If you are simply sending a panel file to a panel. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP file transfers: 1. Set the System Number to 0 (zero). Select URL as the Connection Mode. 6. Any bitmaps. On the Touch Panel. since any existing panel files on the target panel will be wiped out anyway. See the Transfer Options section on page 241.

listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. 3. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs. you may transfer the files. Enter this IP address as the Master's URL/IP on the System Connection Setup page on the touch panel. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button).File Transfer Operations 9. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. 2. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. 242 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 3. To receive files from the panel. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless TCP/IP Transfers. press the Reboot button on the System Connection Setup page to reboot the panel. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. the panel should appear in the online device tree.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear/side of the touch panel. Once you can see the device online. b. After several seconds. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. 4. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the panel. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. Verify that an Ethernet cable is connected from either the rear (NXT models) or side (NXD models) of the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub. which displays the Host Name and IP address for your PC. Verify the green Ethernet LED (on the rear Ethernet port) is illuminated (indicating a proper connection). you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. Click the Properties button to access the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. 2. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. 5. 10. Once you have entered the IP address of the PC (acting as a Virtual NetLinx Master). 3.11 or higher) . Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP) 1. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. a. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 1. Write down the IP address. Once you can see the panel online.

click on the Next buttons. Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. You should see an USB icon show up in the System Tray. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master USB file transfers: 1. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. 5. Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via USB. Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices (you should see the AMX USB LAN LINK device in the list). When the Install Driver dialog does appear. After several seconds. panel. you can use your PC's USB connection to connect directly to the panel. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. 6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels After installation of TPD4. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired.11 or higher) 243 . Driver button. select the Properties button and then the Update 6. This is done via the Virtual NetLinx Master connection in the Connect dialog (Transfer > Connect). This is acceptable.File Transfer Operations Receiving Files From The Panel 1. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). Select any Options (Smart Transfer. In this situation. 3. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. 4. you are ready to connect to the USB port of the G4 panel. 5. 2. please follow the steps below to ensure a valid USB connection to the G4 panels: 1. select to continue the installation. 7. 3. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 2. Power up the Panel without the USB cable connected to the panel. in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog TPDesign4 (v2. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. 3. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via USB: 1. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 3. 2. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. accepting all the default prompts. If the Install Driver dialog doesn't appear automatically. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the 7. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. the panel should appear in the online device tree. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. The OS will complain about the fact that the driver you are installing/updating does not have a digital signature. 4. 2. After installation is complete. Select USB as the Master Connection (this selection causes all other fields in the Master Connection section become read-only).

you may transfer panel files. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs. 3. 2. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 2. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. To receive files from the panel. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. Receiving Files From The Panel 1. 3. 244 TPDesign4 (v2. Once you can see the panel online. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. First plug the USB cable into the PC. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Use a (type-A) USB cable to connect the panel to an available USB port on your PC.11 or higher) . The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. 2.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear or side (depending on the model) of the touch panel. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. 2. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 1. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless USB Transfers. then connect to the panel. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB) 1.File Transfer Operations Once you can see the device online. 3. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1.

via Windows Network Connections settings: 1.File Transfer Operations MVP-5200i USB Driver The MVP-5200i utilizes a native RNDIS USB driver. and select Properties from the context menu. FIG.FIG. Launch the Network Connections dialog (select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections . When the MVP-5200i device is connected to the computer. This invokes the Local Area Connection Properties dialog (FIG. FIG.11 or higher) 245 . It is necessary to supply a static IP address for this LAN connection. 220). you must edit the properties of the TCP/IP interface of the connection itself. This driver utilizes Ethernet-over-USB. To enter a static IP address for the connection. it should create a new LAN connection (see My Computer | My Network Places | View network connections). 220 Local Area Connection Properties dialog TPDesign4 (v2. 219 Network Connections dialog 2. Right-click on the Network Connection that indicates "AMX USB Device Link". 219).

File Transfer Operations 3. FIG. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Select Use the following IP address. This invokes the Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) Properties dialog (FIG. The static IP assigned to this connection should be on the same subnet as the IP address entered on the device Setup Pages (Protected Setup | System Settings | IP Settings | IP Address). 5. 221 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog 4. 246 TPDesign4 (v2. 221). and click on Properties. Click OK to save your changes. and enter the desired (static) IP Address and Subnet Mask for the panel.11 or higher) .

a Status dialog indicates the progress as the various component files are loaded.TPT) Files TPD4 allows you to import VisualArchitect (VA) template files (*. The buttons and pages can be edited. 2. Select File > Import Touch Panel Template to open the Import Touch Panel Template dialog.VAT) as well as TPD4 template files (*. this could take several minutes. To import a touch panel template file into TPD4: 1. 222 Example System Page Template TPDesign4 (v2. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. 222). containing a set of system pages and popup pages (FIG.Working With Templates Working With Templates Importing Template (*. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template.TPT) to import into TPD4 for editing. Working With the System Page Template The System Page Template is a set of pages. Locate and select a Touch Panel Template file (*.VAT or *. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. When you open the System Page Template. copied and pasted just like any other TPD4 project.TPT template files are created and saved as templates in TPD4.VAT template files are created and exported using the VisualArchitect application. *. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters.TPT). it is opened in TPD4 as a project file.11 or higher) 247 . Depending on the size of the template. Once the template has been loaded. *.VAT or *. When a VAT or TPT template file is imported. FIG.

you only want to use some of the features on a System Page. or copy/paste selected elements from a System Page into a page in your project. The System Page Template Pages are all intentionally locked. In this case. and once these pages or buttons exist within your Project they can be modified as needed. System Page buttons always use these settings: Address Port: System Page buttons which require communication from the master controller to the panel. Note that the System Page Templates all have names that begin with two underscores (i. the Address and Channel Port/Code assignments work differently than the buttons you create.e. TPD4 will not allow you to create and save a page with the two underscore prefix. To copy an entire System Page out of the System Page Template folder and paste it into a project: Select File > System Page Template to open the System Page Template folder as a separate project folder in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab).Working With Templates The System Page template is a resource that you can use to copy/paste entire System Pages into your project.setup port) by default. TPD4 will not allow you to save any Page using the doubleunderscore prefix. it is fully editable. and pasted into a Project. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. You can edit or modify the page and contained buttons. Again. Address Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Address Code for easy identification.e. since they always retain their function codes.setup port) by default.e. the Reload last workspace option (in the Application tab of the Preferences dialog) will cause the application to attempt to open the (protected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. To avoid potential conflicts with the System Page Template. Keep in mind that if the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. you can edit function codes (and all other page and button parameters). The pages and popup pages included in the System Page Template are displayed in the Pages tab. However. are always set to the reserved setup port (0 . Once you copy the System Page into your project. For example. "__RGBsetup"). This is to protect the original System Page Template pages from being edited. the Channel Port is always set to the reserved setup port (0 . just like any other page in the Project. just like you would for any other page in the Project. and paste them into any page in your project. Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project You can add System Pages to your project by copying and pasting. The double-underscore prefix indicates that the System Pages are intentionally locked. The pages and the buttons they contain are not editable until they are copied out of the System Page Template folder. you may decide that rather than pasting an entire system page into your project. the name is automatically changed to a single underscore (i. Alternatively. once the System Page Template is copied into a Project. Channel Port: Since System Page buttons require communication out of the panel to the master controller. Once the System Page is pasted into your project. The pages that make up the template cannot be modified directly. "__RGB setup"). When these pages are pasted into a Project. Channel Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Channel Code for easy identification. You can open the System Page Template (via the File menu) and copy entire pages or particular elements from a page. 248 TPDesign4 (v2. "_RGB setup"). you may want to include the entire RGB Setup page in your project. TPD4 treats the System File Template as a password-protected file to avoid accidentally modifying the template pages directly. and the name is (automatically) changed to use a single-underscore prefix. and them paste them into your Project. you can copy/paste just the buttons you want out of a System Page. it is treated like any other page in your project.11 or higher) . if necessary. Note that each System Template page has a descriptive name that begins with two underscores (i. System Pages and the buttons they contain will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. Note that if you click on a button on a System Page. the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file.

Double-click the copied System Page to open it in a Design View window. Select the target project and select Edit > Paste (or use the Paste toolbar button). Like the other System Pages in the System Page Template. Once the System Page button(s) are pasted into your project. while you may not necessarily want to include the entire RGBsetup System Page as a page in your project. 2. once the copied buttons are pasted into a page in your project. Shift. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. for use with telephone connections. but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. The pages in the System Page Template. Once you bring the keyboard/keypad popup pages into your Project. but with several additional symbols (-. and the buttons they contain are locked for editing. Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads One of the most helpful features of the System Page Template is the set of keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages it contains. the System Page name automatically changes from a double. Abort and Done buttons). /. including Caps Lock. they can be modified just like any other button in the project. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. In addition to copying/pasting entire System Page Template pages into your project. However. You cannot cut a System Page out of the System Page Template. Green and Blue Level bargraphs into a page. Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page In some cases. You can use these keyboards and keypads in your Project without having to build the keys or assign the function codes.to a single-underscore prefix (i. Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. allowing text/numeric entries on the panel. until they are pasted into a Project.Working With Templates 1. since they always retain their function codes. and International functionality. :. and they will be fully functional. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. 3. and edit the page and contained buttons like you would any other page in the project. The System Popup Pages include: • keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. In this case. TPD4 allows you to copy/paste specific items from a System Page into an existing page in your project. "_RGBsetup"). you may want to use just the Red. • keyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. Note that once the System Page is pasted into the project. System Page buttons will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. • keypad: • keypadExtend: • keypadPrivate: • keypadTele: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace.e. This indicates that the page will be treated like a "normal" project page from this point on. Similar to the keypad popup page. Clear. Simply copy/paste these popup pages into your Project. . you may have a need for a particular element or set of elements in one of the System Page Templates in your project.. Use the keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages anytime you need to add text/numeric entry functions to your Project. if necessary. For example. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 249 . these popup pages and their contained buttons are locked to editing. the popup pages and all of their buttons can be edited just like any other popup pages and buttons in your Project. you would simply select and copy that set of bargraph buttons from the RGBsetup System Page and paste them right into an existing page in your project. '). Select the System Page (or pages) that you want to copy (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator). you can edit the associated function codes (and all other button parameters). Select Edit > Copy (or use the Copy toolbar button).

This is the Protected Setup page. copy/paste the system page (or just those elements that you want to use in your project) into your Project. Use the Time page to set the system clock. When you open the System Page Template. 2. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. select Edit > Copy. However. Bus Blink.single or double-beep). Dealer ID. • Protected: • Protected ID: • Protected Password: • Protected Secondary ID: This page contains options to allow you to apply password protection to a secondary (wireless) connection. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. you won't have to do any additional work to make the keyboard/keypad work on the panel. Master Connection. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to your Project (File Name.Working With Templates There are two ways to add a keyboard or keypad to your Project: 1. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. This page contains options to allow you change any passwords associated with this Project. Panel Information. This page allows you to match the outgoing screen resolution on an NXP-TPI/4 to the connected touch panel. etc). This page also contains buttons that have page flips to other related System Pages (Project Information. This is the Protected ID page. and copy only the buttons/keys that you plan to use into an existing page in a Project. Baud Rate. Copy and Paste the entire Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Select the appropriate System Template Popup Page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). including one protected password (which only displays asterisks when the password is being entered for additional security). The elements on this page allow you to reset the vertical and horizontal touch points on the LCD. Panel Volume and Default Panel Sounds . remember that once pasted into your Project. Video/RGB Adjustment. Time Adjustment. System Page Template Reference • Battery: • Calibrate: • Calibrate Test: • Panel: • Progress: • Project: The Battery Base page allows you to configure various battery and power related options. etc). • Protected Sensors: • Resolution: • Setup: This page contains options to allow you to configure light and motion sensors on the panel. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. Touch Input Select. Version. The pasted popup page is automatically pasted to the Popup Pages folder for the target Project. Protected Setup). used to indicate the progress of file transfer operations. The elements on this page allow you to confirm that the calibration was done properly. This page contains a Progress Bar. Revision. Panel Information. System Page Template Reference The System Page Template is a set of pages. • Time: 250 TPDesign4 (v2. which contains various setup options that are not usually exposed to the end-user (Device Number. Either way. To use these pages in your project. etc). containing the following pages. then enter the text for each button in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Copy and Paste only selected elements from a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Open a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page. The Setup page allows you to set several basic setup options (Panel Timeout. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to the target panel for this Project. and to specify how time and date values will be displayed on the panel. then select the target Project in the Workspace Navigator and select Edit > Paste. containing options for various system identification information (IP Settings. This is the Project Information page.11 or higher) . these popup pages and buttons are fully editable. Job Name.

where only asterisks are displayed when you type. This page also contains a clock adjust button for setting the system clock. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. Horizontal and Vertical Size/Position and Tracking). and International functionality. This page contains all of the items in the RGB Full Screen System Page. Contrast. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. Shift. Status. for use with telephone connections. The options in this page allow you to configure the master volume settings for the panel. :. Full Screen Edit. KeypadTele: Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. Version and Status text-area buttons. where only asterisks are displayed when you type.) • RGB Full Screen: This page contains options to allow you to adjust various aspects of the RGB signal (Red.Working With Templates System Page Template Reference (Cont. . Keyboard Virtual: For use with Computer Control buttons to simulate the keyboard on the PC. plus buttons for returning to default settings. plus buttons to indicate video source slot assignments (which relate to video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4). /. including Caps Lock. Clear. TPDesign4 (v2. Abort and Done buttons). KeypadPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. KeypadExtend: Similar to the keypad popup page. and several other buttons to allow a return to the Default RGB values. Warning Message: This is the Battery Base warning message. • RGB Setup: • Video Setup: • Volume: System Page Template Popup Pages The System Page Template also includes several popup pages: Keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. Green and Blue levels. but with several additional symbols (-. undo changes.. '). Saturation and Hue).11 or higher) 251 . The Video Setup page contains options for setting/adjusting the video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4 (Brightness. save changes and other textarea buttons relating to video sources (Version. Undo changes. KeyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. Input and Format). Keypad: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. Save Settings.

TPD4 does not support the creation of G4 PanelBuilder templates for R-4 remote devices (since R-4 remotes must implement navigation elements in the form of pages in order for the Back and Up/Down buttons on the remote to function correctly). [nav#navName]pageName. Also. 2. named in a manner that G4 PanelBuilder will understand the relationship between all of the elements. Any number of template files (*. Suggestion: Start with the most complex Device element first. The key for creating your own elements naming conventions. popups and buttons. Suggestion: Create a simple TPD4 file showing the desired output. The menu option to export a project as a G4 PanelBuilder template will be disabled for R-4 projects. 3. Suggestion: Mock up the interface in TPD4 by opening the corresponding page and display all applicable popups. etc. You must have a minimum of 1 Placeholder element. then make copies of it. Things to remember: You must have a minimum of 1 Navigation element. G4 PanelBuilder requires that navigation elements in a template be implemented as pop-ups.11 or higher) . 4 items.png"). in fact AMX templates utilize a 1/4 screen size to reduce the template file size. Start with the Device and Navigation elements first and the Placeholder elements last. You must have a main preview image ("[preview]. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. Select File > Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template to open the Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template dialog. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400. Create the preview images for the elements. the minimum number to make a template family. The resolutions and panel types are provided here. create several different variations of Navigation and Sub-Navigations (3 items. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. Doing this gives you a starting point to begin looking at how to modify the TPD4 file to create a template..).TPT) file. You should spend some time deciding what you want the panel to do.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. Make sure they do not conflict with each other. What navigation model are you going to use? You know you're going to have the required template elements but are some of your menus so complex they will require sub-menus? What devices and features will the template include? Consider using some optional template elements. where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. G4 PanelBuilder customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. A G4 PanelBuilder template is a TPD4 file complete with pages. You cannot create a "drill-down" style of navigation with G4 PanelBuilder. Careful consideration will reveal the type of navigation you will need. Then. Select Page > Copy Image To Clipboard. Images do not have to be full size. This method allows you to modify and delete thus the pages are more likely to be similar.TPT) file that will be created from this project. 252 TPDesign4 (v2. You are ready to begin restructuring the elements to fit your needs.. Then open the resource manager and select Paste. G4 PanelBuilder looks for navigations with the name. Your navigation menus will always be on top of your Devices. Now rename the new image to the appropriate element name. On the other hand. based on the established elements. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. but many more panel types.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*.jpg" or "[preview]. 1.

Things to remember: You can use TPD4's Save As Other Panel Type when appropriate or as a starting point. FIG.Working With Templates 4. Not all resolutions have to be done at once. if applicable. 223). this is the basis of a template family.11 or higher) 253 . 223 TPD4 Workspace . do a generate. Below is the workspace for TPD4. After you have completed the template design. A .TPT file is created and a list of errors and warnings are displayed at this time. Leave the "Job Name" in the Panel Properties the same for all related TPD4 files.Example G4 PanelBuilder Template TPDesign4 (v2. 5. Repeat the design for other resolutions. If necessary you can build the ones you currently need and address the other resolutions as they present themselves. The pages are highlighted in the color of the element they represent (FIG.

Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . 254 TPDesign4 (v2. Only one of the pages or popups in A Navigation element can contain an Info button. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Navigation element and can contain an optional icon image. Consists of at least one popup but can contain multiple popups.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. [item]buttonName buttonName . pageName . The chart below demonstrates these rules (FIG.Required Template Elements When designing a template it is important to remember the rules that govern elements and their relation with the templates.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. FIG. Element Specific Conventions: [nav#navName]pageName navName . Cannot contain any pages Only one can be displayed at a time. 224). Popups in a Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. buttonName.Required Template Elements The template must have at least one of each of the following elements: Navigation Elements This is the main menu where most of your navigation selections are made. 224 G4 PanelBuilder Templates . [title]buttonName buttonName .11 or higher) .This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. The popups in the Navigation element must contain at lest one item button that will be filled with navigation information. The text will be replaced with the name given to the Navigation in the generated TP4 project.The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. Item buttons are ordered within the Navigation element in order of left to right then top to bottom. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox.

11 or higher) 255 .This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Placeholder element and can also contain an optional icon image. Only one page or popup within a Placeholder element can contain an Info button.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The button name will be used in the generated TP4 project. Element Specific Conventions: [placeholder#placeholderName]pageName placeholderName .The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. buttonName .This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. pageName . The text is replaced with the name given to the Placeholder element in the generated TP4 project. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. buttonName . Only one Placeholder element can be displayed at a time. buttonName . TPDesign4 (v2. pageName . Consists of one page and may have optional popups.Working With Templates navName .The name of the Placeholder element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. [title]buttonName buttonName . buttonName .The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. The pages and popups in a Placeholder element can contain one or more Title buttons.The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. Placeholder Elements This is a blank device element that allows you to represent unique items in the diagram area.

the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one page in a Mode element can contain an Info button." Additionally.11 or higher) . The page in the Mode element must contain at least one Item button that contains the navigation information.. There are rules that govern all template elements (FIG. buttonName . Consists of a single page and can contain multiple popups. Element Specific Conventions: [mode#modeName]pageName modeName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. Only one Mode element can be displayed at a time. 225): FIG.Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . i. pageName . Item buttons are ordered within the Mode element by left-to-right then top-to-bottom.Optional Template Elements Your templates can have any of the following: Mode Elements This element is generally used for designating "modes" your system will work in. [item]buttonName buttonName .Optional Template Elements There are required elements when developing templates but G4 PanelBuilder also supports a series of optional elements that will make your templates more robust. 256 TPDesign4 (v2. "Video Conference Mode" or "Presentation Mode. 225 G4 PanelBuilder Templates . The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Mode element and can also contain an optional icon image.e.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder.Unused. Mode elements can be associated with rooms.

Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain an Info button.Unused.Working With Templates Popups in a Mode element can contain one or more Title buttons. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. TPDesign4 (v2. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.11 or higher) 257 .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. The popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . pageName . navName . Cannot contain pages. Element Specific Conventions: [splash#splashName]pageName splashName .Unused. i.The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName . The text within the Title buttons are replaced with the name given to the Sub-Navigation in the generated TP4 project. modeName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName .e. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Navigation element and can also contain an optional icon image. pageName . Element Specific Conventions: [subnav#navName]pageName navName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Splash Elements This element is a popup that can contain an image.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName . Item buttons are ordered in the Navigation element left-to-right then top-to-bottom. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Mode in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. Cannot contain pages. [item]buttonName buttonName . buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Popups in the Sub-Navigation element must contain at least one Item button that will contain navigation information.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. buttonName . Sub-Navigation Elements This element is a submenu and can occur on screen with Navigation elements.Unused. buttonName .. buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . corporate logo.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.

For reference.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. Only one page or popup in a Device element can contain an Info button which contains the page flip information for displaying the Device element and can also contain an optional icon image. consult AMX templates where we list the most commonly used devices. Element Specific Conventions: [device#deviceName]pageName deviceName . Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Device element in the generated TP4 project. splashName . pageName . 258 TPDesign4 (v2. this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. pageName .The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Popups in a Splash element can contain one or more Title buttons.Unused. Device Elements This element is the actual device used. the "Clean Panel" feature.Unused. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. there can only be one Feature element in a panel design.11 or higher) . buttonName . Only one Feature element can be displayed at a time.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . buttonName . Pages and popups in a Device element can contain one or more Title buttons. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Splash element and can also contain an optional icon image.Working With Templates Only one of the popups in a Splash element can contain an Info button. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Splash element in the generated TP4 project.Unused. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. Only one Device element can be displayed at a time.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName . buttonName . buttonName . [title]buttonName buttonName . [title]buttonName buttonName . i. buttonName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Element Specific Conventions: [feature#featureName]pageName featureName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project.e.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.Unused.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. pageName . Feature Elements This element resembles the Device element. deviceName . However.

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template In addition to the template requirements and required elements. Popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons.e. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. "volume.Unused.Unused. Sub-Feature Elements This element represents the "universal" features that appear on many pages. Feature or Placeholder element from a Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. featureName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.11 or higher) 259 . buttonName .The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName . Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. Only one of the pages or popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain an Info button.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. When navigating to a Device. buttonName . TPDesign4 (v2. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Sub-Feature element in the generated TP4 project. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the element. pageName ." Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. The pages and popups in the Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.Unused. there are rules for navigating the templates and template wide conventions you need to heed.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element.Unused. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.. pageName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. i. [title]buttonName buttonName . Cannot contain pages.Working With Templates Only one page or popup in a Feature element can contain an Info button. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Feature in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName .The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Show any popups for the element. when applicable. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . Element Specific Conventions: [subFeature#subFeatureName]pageName subFeatureName . subFeatureName . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . buttonName .

Show any popups for the element. The main preview image should be named '[preview].The string "[text]" is required on the button wherever text is to be replaced in the output file.e.Working With Templates Any Sub-Navigation elements that may have been currently displayed will be hidden. Preview Images . they are replaced with the "Job Name" of the panel.jpg. Otherwise. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. or if an icon is used on the corresponding Navigation or Sub-Navigation button. popup pages are shown in alphabetical order. i. When navigating to a Device. the Sub-Navigation is not shown. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the Sub-Navigation element or chain.. If the text on a button to be replaced does not contain '[text]" then it is unchanged.Template Wide Conventions Text Replacement . then show the Sub-Navigation element that is linked to the element." There can only be one preview image per element. Panel Title . The element previews should follow the same naming conventions as their page prefixes. if not all popup pages should be initially shown. when applicable. The string "[text]" allows you to prepend/postpend text with characters.A template can contain as many buttons named "[panelTitle]" as necessary.jpg" (or . Feature or Placeholder element from a Sub-Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element. 260 TPDesign4 (v2. Info buttons are optional and only have to be included within an element if the order the popup pages is shown is important.A template must contain a main preview image and can also contain a preview image for each element.11 or higher) .png). "[device#DVD]. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element. For Sub-Navigations the user must set "Hide On Action" to No. If the Info button is omitted. G4 PanelBuilder Templates .

Dual [device#HVAC .Single [device#Lift]Lift [device#Light Zone]Light Zone [device#Monitor]Monitor [device#Pool]Pool [device#Screen]Screen [device#Security]Security [device#Shade]Shade [device#Slide Projector]Slide Projector [device#Spa]Spa [device#Switcher size]Switcher size [device#Radio]Radio [device#TV]TV [device#VCR]VCR [device#Video Projector]Video Projector [device#Volume -Dual]Volume .AMX Naming Convention Device Names Audio Conference Cable Box Camera Cassette Deck CD Document Camera Door DSS DVD DVR HVAC .Single Example [feature#US Weather Maps]US Weather Maps Example [mode#Mode 3]Mode 3 Example [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 Description [mode#Mode x] x = the number of mode options Description [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 x = the number of navigation options G4 Computer Control [device#Computer Control]G4CC TPDesign4 (v2.Dual Volume .AMX Naming Conventions AMX urges you to use the following naming convention to allow for portability between templates.Single]HVAC .Single]Volume . G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Single Feature Names US Weather Maps Mode Names Mode X Navigation Names Nav X Example [device#Audio Conference]Audio Conference [device#Cable Box]Cable Box [device#Camera]Camera [device#Cassette Deck]Cassette Deck [device#CD]CD [device#Document Camera]Document Camera [device#Door]Door [device#DSS]DSS [device#DVD]DVD [device#DVR]DVR [device#HVAC . Errors could occur if the elements do not match from template to template.Dual HVAC .Dual [device#Volume .11 or higher) 261 .Dual]HVAC .Single Lift Light Zone Monitor Pool Screen Security Shade Slide Projector Spa Switcher size Radio TV VCR Video Projector Volume .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates .

Navigations as Pages TPD4 modifies the export of panel projects as VisualArchitect templates to allow navigation elements to be implemented as pages instead of popup pages for panel projects of device class "remote".VAT) file. These two buttons are named [scrollbartop] and [scrollbarbottom]. 262 TPDesign4 (v2. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. based on the established elements.VAT) file that will be created from this project. Then. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. Select File > Export As VisualArchitect Template to open the Export As VisualArchitect Template dialog. VisualArchitect customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. Any number of template files (*. A VisualArchitect template is a TPD4 file complete with pages. where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. TPD4 limits navigation elements of device class "panel" to pop-up pages only.Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that are used to implement a scrollbar. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the VisualArchitect Template (*.11 or higher) .TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. VA Templates . Also. VA Templates . You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a VisualArchitect Template (*. popups and buttons. but 12 different panel types. named in a manner that VisualArchitect will understand the relationship between all of the elements. the minimum number to make a template family. The resolutions and panel types are as follows: Resolution 640x480 800x600 Panel Type • MVP-7500 • TPI4 • MVP-8400 • CA12 • CV12 • TPI4 800x480 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • TPI4 1280x1024 1280x768 • TPI4 • CV17 According to the table there are only 6 resolutions.

VA Templates . starting with itself. VA Templates .Logical Page Info Element Logical pages must contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element that will be used to identify the first page of a logical page group. These two buttons are named [logicalupbtn] and [logicaldownbtn]. There should be one and only one [logicalinfobtn] button element for each logical page group. Each list box page must contain one of each of these elements. Each logical page must contain one of each of these elements. A logical page that is itself the only page of a logical page group must still contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element containing at least one page flip (to itself).List Box Page Up and Down Elements List box pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement list box single up/down operations. or placeholder implementation.11 or higher) 263 .Working With Templates VA Templates . These two buttons are named [listboxupbtn] and [listboxdownbtn]. This button should contain the list of individual logical pages belonging to the logical page collection. TPDesign4 (v2. feature. A [logicalinfobtn] button element must be present in addition to a [info] button element that might be required to indicate that the logical page belongs to a device.Logical Page Up and Down Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement page flips within the logical page group.

11 or higher) .Working With Templates 264 TPDesign4 (v2.

226 Preferences Dialog . Preferences Dialog .11 or higher) 265 . where you can set general program preferences for TPD4. although the data that makes them up is still saved. TPDesign4 (v2. Editor Selection: The items in this tab allow you associate external editing programs with image and sound files that can be accessed through TPD4.Program Preferences Program Preferences Overview Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. Reload last workspace: This option will reopen the last panel file and the pages (including popup pages) that were open when the application was closed (assuming that a panel file was open when the application was closed). Appearance: The items in this tab relate to the Design View window. Undo/Redo Support and Miscellaneous program settings. Backup copies and the image library directory. With this option unchecked. "Directories: The items in this tab allow you to specify default directories for Panel files. 226 shows the Application tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. system generated filenames are not generated.Application tab The items in the Application tab include: Startup Prompt for system generated name: This option will default the checkbox for system generated filenames (in the New Project Wizard) to the checked position. Use the Customize dialog to customize the TPD4 GUI. This dialog contains four tabs: Application: The items in this tab relate to Startup.Application tab FIG.

266 TPDesign4 (v2. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.Pages tab) on application startup. it must be loaded again from disc. Note that this option does not take effect immediately on pressing Apply.Program Preferences If the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. when the project is saved successfully (default = enabled). Since there is not a password to unlock the file. Warning Messages When deleting resources in use: Click to receive a warning from TPD4 when you attempt to delete resources that are currently being used by the open project. depending on their size) to speed up loading and displaying those images. if a name conflict occurs. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Increase the cache size to keep more images in memory (potentially. Click Apply to apply any changes. Expand Workspace Navigator: This option will expand the tree structure (in the Workspace Navigator . which is a much slower operation. without saving any changes. the Reload last workspace option will cause the application to attempt to open the (passwordprotected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. the tool is reverted to the Selection Tool at the completion of every button draw operation. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. this option flushes system memory of any pages that were previously opened but now closed. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Use "Copy of" prefixes: This option automatically adds the prefix "Copy of" to any pasted pages and popup pages. by design the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. but will take effect the next time you open a project file. With this option unchecked.11 or higher) . The image cache size value specifies the amount of memory allocated for images used in displaying buttons (in the Design View. Miscellaneous Flush Closed Pages on Save: When enabled. If an image is not found in the in-memory cache. With this option unchecked. Image Cache Size (MB): Use the up and down arrows to adjust the size of the image cache (default = 8 MB). the user will be asked to resolve the name conflict. Retain selected tool: This option locks the selected tool (Selection Tool or Button Draw Tool). and Button Preview). Create backup copy: This option saves a backup copy of the panel file to the backup folder every time you perform a save operation. State Manager.

where you can either use the zoom in and out icons to zoom in/out (in 25% increments). To use this option. TPDesign4 (v2. For example. Because there are variations in dots per inch measurements among panels and among computer monitors. Gutter Color: The Gutter is the area around the outer edge of the Design View windows. You can also manually set the zoom factor on any page or popup page by selecting the page and using the Zoom Toolbar. or select the zoom setting (including Fit Page. This setting does not affect the zoom setting for pages that are already open. you must first specify their monitor's visible size (in the Monitor Size field .see below). Once of the Initial Zoom options is called Actual Size. and you want to work with multiple pages without cascading them (which could result in part of the page window being outside of the viewable area). as opposed to the monitor's overall diagonal size. 227 Preferences Dialog . Fit Height) from the drop-down list. this option allows you to see how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the panel.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Auto Stack New Windows: This setting causes all page windows to stack directly on top of the last active (selected) page window. 227 shows the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. Fit Width. Default = enabled. most 21" monitors typically have between a 19. Use this option if you are working on a resolution or zoom setting that takes up most or all of your screen area.5" and 20" viewable area. This number should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a fullscreen image. Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the gutter on all new Design View windows.Appearance tab The items in the Appearance tab include: Window Initial Zoom: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of the zoom settings that can be applied as the default initial zoom setting for all new Design View windows.Appearance tab FIG.11 or higher) 267 . Monitor Size: Use this field to specify the size of the visible portion of the monitor that your pages will actually be displayed on (see Initial Zoom and Note above).

Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. 268 TPDesign4 (v2. Size: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard sizes. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. without saving any changes. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. via the Button Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar). The options are Light. If Custom is selected. Medium and Large. This set of options allow you to modify the way that the transparency checkerboard appears. the default setting is 8. the Custom Colors option is enabled (see below). In certain situations. Custom Colors: If Custom was selected as the Style (see above). and in the Button Preview when a state is transparent. Style: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard styles that can be used to represent transparency. Medium. The range is 4 . Transparency Transparent colors in TPDesign4 are represented by a checkerboard pattern. in the State Manager when a state is transparent. The options are Tiny. Click Apply to apply any changes. The Transparency checkerboard is visible on pages and popup pages that are transparent.255. then you can specify a custom color combination for the checkerboard by selecting from these two drop-down lists.11 or higher) . Snap Tolerance: Use the up/down arrows to specify the snap tolerance for the grid. changing the checkerboard style to different sizes. The snap tolerance represents the number of pixels within which objects in the Design View window will "snap" to the nearest grid line (applicable only when the Snap To Grid option is enabled.Program Preferences The Auto Stack and Initial Zoom settings are retained the next time you launch the program. shades and/or colors can facilitate viewing and working with graphics. Grid Size: Use the up/down arrows to set the default grid size (measured in pixels). Dashed Line or Dots). Small. Grid Color: Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the grid (if enabled) on all new Design View windows. Dark and Custom. Grid Grid Style: Select from the drop-down list of styles that the grid can be displayed in (Line.

where you can navigate to an alternative folder. Reset: Click to reset all options in the Directories tab to their default settings. Temp folder location: Use this field to set the location of the folder TPD4 uses for any temp files. 228 Preferences Dialog . In these situations the Temp folder cannot be changed since it is being actively used. without saving any changes..11 or higher) 269 . This feature accommodates the potential for large projects which need an especially large amount of temporary disk space. If you either have a panel open or a transfer in progress the Temp Folder Location field is disabled.Directories tab The items in the Directories tab include: Default Directories Panels: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all Panel (or project) files (*.Directories tab FIG.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog.. where you can navigate to an alternative folder.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog. 228 shows the Directories tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.. Click the browse button (. Backup copies: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all *. TPDesign4 (v2. Click Apply to apply any changes.TP4 Backup files. This field is re-enabled once all panels are closed and transfers are completed. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.. Click the browse button (.TP4).

Add Editor button . The Default column indicates which of the programs is currently set as the default editor.Editor Selection tab The options in the Editor Selection tab allow you to associate external programs of your choice with image and sound files. 229 shows the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. 229 Preferences Dialog . Editors table . The items in the Editor Selection tab include: Editor Type menu .11 or higher) .Editor Selection tab FIG. and disassociate it from image or sound files in TPD4. click this button to remove it from the list.EXE and file path.Click the down arrow to select either Image Editors or Sound Editors from the drop-down list. Once you have associated an external program to image and/or sound editor.Click to add either an image or a sound editing program to the Editors list (depending on the Editor Type selected). Remove Editor button . you can edit image and files by selecting the file in either the Images or Sounds tab of the Resource Manager and clicking the Edit button.With an editor selected (in the Editors list). 270 TPDesign4 (v2.Lists all external image or sound editing programs (depending on the Editor Type selected) that have been added. by filename (*.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . to accommodate in-place editing of the images and sounds used in your Project.

Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. 230 Preferences Dialog . Pressing OK or Accept after enabling/disabling the undo system will result in a clearing of the undo/redo history. 230 shows the Undo/Redo tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. this option is selected. Enable the Redo system: This option enables/disables the ability to redo actions. that page will automatically be reopened to show the button that was affected at the point that the Undo is performed. this option is selected. By default. without saving any changes. the program will always display the page(s) affected by an undo operation. if you changed a button property on a button that exists on a page that has been closed. By default. Show affected pages on Undo: With this option enabled. Number of Undo Levels: Use the up/down arrows to change the number of undo actions allowed (default = 500). this option will automatically change the selection so that the item(s) affected by the Undo / Redo action are selected. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog .11 or higher) 271 . TPDesign4 (v2. Click Apply to apply any changes.Undo/Redo tab The items in the Undo/Redo tab include: Undo / Redo Support Enable the Undo system: This option enables/disables the ability to undo actions. Change selection on Undo: When enabled. even they have been closed since that action was performed.Undo/Redo tab FIG. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. For example.

and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. 4. If you add additional programs to the list.Program Preferences Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. in the Open dialog.EXE) file. 2. in the Open dialog.Editor Selection tab Note that Image Editors is already selected in the Editor Type drop-down menu. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1. 272 TPDesign4 (v2. Click the down arrow and select Sound Editors from the Editor Type drop-down menu. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files...EXE) file. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog.11 or higher) .. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1. FIG. you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. Click the Browse button (.) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. 2. 231 Preferences dialog .. 3. Click the Browse button (. 4. 231). Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG.) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. 3. 231). Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files.

3. FIG. Double-click on any program in the list (other than the current default) to access the Choose Editor dialog.11 or higher) 273 . you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. The Default column indicates which program is the current default (TRUE = current default). Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. TPDesign4 (v2. 5. Check the Default Editor checkbox to set the selected program as the default editor (FIG. 232 Preferences dialog . 233). This selection populates the Editors table with a listing of all editing programs that have been added. 4.Editor Selection tab The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor.Program Preferences FIG. Select the Editor Type that you want to change the default program for (Image Editors or Sound Editors) from the drop-down menu. and open the Editor Selection tab. 233 Choose Editor dialog (Default Editor option selected) 5. If you add additional programs to the list. Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program You can change the default image or sound editor program via the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: 1. Click OK to close the Choose Editor dialog. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. 2.

While holding the mouse-button down. 3. FIG. 5.11 or higher) . if one exists. 234). 2. Alternatively. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the toolbar. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. 4.Program Preferences The new default editor is indicated in the Default column of the Editors table (FIG. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). drag the command/icon to a toolbar. The command/icon is placed as a button in the toolbar. Select a command category (under Categories). regardless of category.Command tab Customizing the Toolbars Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars 1. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). to the Commands tab. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 274 TPDesign4 (v2. 234 Default Editor Indicated In the Default Column of the Editors Table Customizing the Menus and Toolbars Use the options in the Command tab of the Customize dialog to customize the contents of the TPD4 toolbars and menus (FIG. and release the mouse button. 6. along with their associated toolbar icon. 235 Customize dialog . Note that the cursor symbol indicates that it is not allowed to be placed anywhere except inside the area of a toolbar (any toolbar). FIG. 235).

236 Customizing menu items 3. For menu items. right-click on the select the button that you want to associate an icon with to open the context menu. 2. as long as the Customize dialog is open. Select an icon from the User-Defined Image field. Select Button Appearance to open the Button Appearance dialog (FIG. FIG. For toolbar buttons. Release the mouse button to delete the button from the toolbar. 5. In the Button Appearance dialog. right-click on a menu item (FIG. 237). 236). While holding the mouse button down. select Image Only or Image and Text (the Text Only option does not allow you to associate an icon). FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). drag the button to any area outside of a toolbar. Click to select a toolbar button from an existing toolbar. you can associate an icon with the command: 1. 4. Associating an Icon With a New Command Once you have added a new command to a Toolbar or Menu.11 or higher) 275 . Click OK. 237 Button Appearance dialog 4. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the button is dragged outside of the toolbars. Alternatively. Select Delete to delete the button. 3. you can simply right-click on any button to open the New Command context menu.Program Preferences Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars 1. 2. 6. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize).

The new toolbar name appears in the Toolbars list. With the empty toolbar in place. This opens the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. 7. FIG. FIG. 238). Click and drag to move the new toolbar icon into position. Repeat this process to add as many commands as you like to your custom toolbar(s) (FIG. 276 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. 238 Customize dialog . 8. 2. in an empty area near the other toolbars. Enter the new name in the Toolbar Name text field and click OK to save the change. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. 239). 238 on page 276). Select the toolbar you want to rename from the list. and click Rename to open the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. 240). Click the New button. 5. 4. Enter a name for the new toolbar in the text field and click OK.Toolbars tab 2. along with an empty new toolbar icon. 6. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. Click and drag commands from the Commands list and drop them inside the area of the new toolbar. open the Commands tab of the Customize dialog. 239 Toolbar Name dialog 3. 240 Dragging a Command From the Commands List Into the New Toolbar Renaming Custom Toolbars 1. 239).11 or higher) . 3.Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Toolbar 1. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a list of commands (under Commands).

and release the mouse button. Release the mouse button to delete the item from the menu. 3. 2. 241 Customize dialog . Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the menu item is dragged outside of the menus. 6. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab. Removing Commands From Existing Menus 1. 7.11 or higher) 277 . Alternatively. 241). as long as the Customize dialog is open.Adding Commands To Existing Menus 4. The standard TPD4 toolbars cannot be deleted. While holding the mouse button down. regardless of category (FIG. Select a command category (under Categories). While holding the mouse-button down. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. Alternatively. along with their associated toolbar icon. to the Commands tab (FIG. 5. FIG. Select Delete to delete the button. 3. The command/icon is placed as a new option in the menu. 235 on page 274). Open the Customize dialog. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). drag the menu item to any area outside of a menu. 2. Open the Customize dialog. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). 4. 2.Program Preferences Deleting Custom Toolbars To delete custom (user-added) toolbars from the TPD4 workspace: 1. 3. Click to select a custom toolbar. TPDesign4 (v2. Click Delete to permanently delete the selected toolbar. drag the command/icon to the open menu. Open the menu to which you want to add a command. Click to select a menu item from an existing menu. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the menu. Customizing the Menus Adding Commands To Existing Menus 1. if one exists. you can simply right-click on any menu item to open the Command context menu.

Type the name for the new menu in the Button Text field and press OK. 245). drag the New Menu icon to a location within the Menu Bar (FIG. Open the Customize dialog. To name the new menu.Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Menu 1.Creating a New Custom Menu This item represents a new "empty" menu. 245 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 8. This places the "New Menu" entry in the Commands list (FIG. FIG. 243 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 4. FIG. Release the mouse button to place the selected command in the new menu.11 or higher) . 244 Creating the New (Empty) Menu At the Cursor Location 5. 278 TPDesign4 (v2. 7. 235 on page 274). 6. FIG. 243). Add commands to the new menu by clicking and dragging commands from the Commands list to the new menu (FIG. 244). to the Commands tab (FIG. Release the mouse button to create the new (empty) menu at the cursor location (FIG. and select Button Appearance. Select New Menu from the Categories list. 2. right-click on the menu to open the New Command context menu. This opens the Button Appearance dialog. 3. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a set of commands (under Commands). While holding the mouse button down. 242). 242 Customize dialog . FIG.

as you want it to appear in the Tools menu. 4.11 or higher) 279 . if necessary.EXE file in the Open dialog. New (Insert) button FIG. 5. The directory path is displayed in the Command text box. 7. click the browse button (. Click the New (Insert) button to create an empty text field in the Menu Contents list.Toolbars tab 2. The new shortcut should appear at the bottom of the Tools menu. Enter a name for the application. Next to the Command field. Click Close to close the Customize dialog. Open the Customize dialog to the Tools tab (FIG. 6.Program Preferences Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu Use the options in the Tools tab of the Customize dialog to add/remove shortcuts to external applications in the Tools menu: 1. TPDesign4 (v2. 246 Customize dialog . Specify an Initial Directory.) to locate and select the application's. 3.. Specify any Arguments. 246).. if necessary.

You can view all of the current hotkey assignments in the Help Keyboard dialog (Help > Keyboard Map). 280 TPDesign4 (v2. To remove a hotkey assignment. Open the Customize dialog. The information in this dialog is read-only. and click Remove. sometimes referred to as "Keyboard Accelerators" (such as CTRL+C for the "Copy" command) can be customized in TPD4. as opposed to the minus key in the main key set. 3. Choose a command category in the Category drop-down menu. Multiple hotkeys can be assigned to the same command. Click Assign to assign the key(s) to the selected menu item. 4. 2. Choose a command in the Commands list. but only the first one will be displayed next to the item in the menu after this type of change. then highlight the command's hotkey assignment in the Current Keys list. Enter the new Hotkeys) in the Select New Shortcut Key field. 247): FIG. to the Keyboard tab. Setting Custom Hotkeys Use the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog to create new Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators). If you assign the minus key (-). click Reset All. or to modify existing ones (FIG. select the command in the Commands list. always use the number pad on your keyboard.Program Preferences Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) Hotkeys.11 or higher) . To reset all hotkey assignments to their default settings. 247 Customize dialog .Keyboard tab 1. 5.

Program Preferences TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 281 .

TX 75082 USA • 800.624.It’s Your World .8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.932. All rights reserved.0193 • 469.com 9/09 ©2009 AMX.amx.6993 technical support • www.222. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.Take Control™ 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE. RICHARDSON. AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX. .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful